foreword read firstŠthen drive safely · 5. air cleaner (p. 8-22) 6. battery (p. 8-18) 7....

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own-er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiaritywith controls and maintenance requirements, as-sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and complete trip foryou and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Preteenchildren should be seated in the rearseat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this owner’s manual forimportant safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting frommodifications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Z REVIEW COPY—2006 Altima (l30)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)02/23/06—arosenma X

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

© 2006 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL


NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, California 90248-0191

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM


Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10


1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-25)2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-9)3. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bags (P. 1-34)4. Supplemental side impact air bags

(P. 1-34)5. Front head restraint (P. 1-7, P. 1-8)6. Front seat belts (P. 1-9)7. Supplemental front impact air bags

(P. 1-34)8. Seats (P. 1-2)9. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor) (P.1-42)10. Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-48)11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-24)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0068

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents


1. Engine hood (P. 3-9)2. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-21)3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)4. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-19)5. Windshield (P. 8-25)6. Power windows (P. 2-37)7. Door locks, keyfob, keys

(P. 3-3, 3-5, 3-2)8. Mirrors (P. 3-15)9. Tire pressure (P. 8-40)10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)11. Tire chains (P. 8-48)12. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-25)13. Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-11)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0044

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3


1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-20)2. Trunk lid (P. 3-10)3. Vehicle loading (P.9-12)4. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-11)5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)6. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-12, P. 9-3)7. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-12)8. Child safety locks (P. 3-5)

LII0023

EXTERIOR REAR



1. Glove box (P. 2-33)2. Automatic anti-glare inside mirror

(if so equipped) (P. 3-15)3. Sun visors (P. 3-14)4. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-40)5. Front seat (P. 1-2)6. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-39)7. Interior trunk access (P. 1-6)8. Rear seat (P. 1-6)9. Front console (P. 2-33)10. Front cup holders (P. 2-32)11. Parking brake, parking on hills

(P. 5-14, P. 5-18)12. HomeLinkT (if so equipped) (P. 2-42)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0026

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT



1. Driver, center and passenger ventila-tors (P. 4-11)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turnsignal switch (P. 2-21)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) (P. 4-40)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn(P. 1-34, 2-26)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)6. Cruise control main/set switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-15)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-19)8. Storage (if so equipped) (P. 2-30)9. Glove box (P. 2-33)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-34)11. Heater and air conditioner (manual or

automatic) (P. 4-11, P. 4-20)12. Power outlet or cigarette lighter

(if so equipped) (P. 2-28, P. 2-29)13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-27)14. Shift selector lever (P. 5-7)15. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-26)16. Storage or ashtray (if so equipped)

(P. 2-30, P. 2-29)WIC0902

INSTRUMENT PANEL



17 Front passenger air bag status light(P. 1-43)

18. Audio system controls (if so equipped)(P. 4-23)

19. Ignition switch (P. 5-4)20. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls

(P. 3-13)21. Traction control system (TCS) off

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-28)22. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-24)23. Trunk opener (P. 3-10)24. Meters and guages (if so equipped)

(P. 2-3)25. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)26. Navigation system* controls

(if so equipped) (P. 4-2)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual.

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.



QR25DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)2. Spark plug caps (P. 8-21)3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-17)4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)

(P. 8-17)5. Air cleaner (P. 8-22)6. Battery (P. 8-18)7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-27)8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models)

(P. 8-14)9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)10. Radiator cap (P. 8-9)11. Drive belt location (P.8-20)12. Fuse block (P. 8-27)13. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-18)14. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-9)15. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.


WDI0488

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



VQ35DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-17)4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)

(P. 8-17)5. Air cleaner (P. 8-22)6. Battery (P. 8-18)7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-27)8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models)

(P. 8-16)9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)10. Radiator cap (P. 8-9)11. Drive belt location (P.8-20)12. Fuse block (P. 8-27)13. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-18)14. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-9)

NOTE:



WDI0489



Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock brakewarning light (if soequipped)

2-11

Automatic transmis-sion check warninglight (if so equipped)

2-12

or

Brake warning light 2-12

Charge warninglight

2-12

Door open warninglight

2-12

Engine oil pressurewarning light

2-12

Low fuel warninglight

2-13

Warninglight

Name Page

Low windshieldwasher fluid warninglight

2-13

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-13

Supplemental airbag warning light

1-49

Trunk lid open warn-ing light

2-14

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Automatic transmis-sion position indica-tor light (A/T mod-els)

5-4

CRUISE mainswitch indicator light(if so equipped)

5-15

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Cruise SET switchindicator light (if soequipped)

5-15

Front passenger airbag status light

2-14

High beam indicatorlight (blue)

2-14

Malfunction indica-tor light (MIL)

2-14

Slip indicator light (ifso equipped)

2-15

Traction control sys-tem off indicatorlight (if so equipped)

2-15

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-15

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS


Z REVIEW COPY—2006 Altima (l30)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)03/03/06—pattie X

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front power seat adjustment(if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Active head restraint (front seats). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Child restraint installation on rear seat centeror outboard positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Child restraint installation on front passengerseat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29Booster seat installation on rear seat centeror outboard positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32Booster seat installation on front passengerseat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49


WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on Seat Belt Usage” later in thissection.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT

WARNING

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat tomake sure it is securely locked.

WARNING

● Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation. The seat may movesuddenly and could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped.

WARNING

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat tomake sure it is securely locked.

WRS0175 WRS0176

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3


Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height ofthe seat cushion to the desired position.

FRONT POWER SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped fordriver’s seat)

WARNING

● Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation. The seat may movesuddenly and could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-resetoverload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 seconds,then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for along period of time when the engine is off.This will discharge the battery.

WRS0131 WRS0163



Forward and backwardMoving the switch forward or backward will slidethe seat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

RecliningMove the recline switch backward until the de-sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackforward again, move the switch forward andmove your body forward. The seatback will moveforward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section). Also, the seatback can be re-clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-hicle is stopped.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Push the front or rear end of the switch up ordown to adjust the angle and height of the seatcushion.

Lumbar support (if so equipped fordriver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever forward orbackward to adjust the seat lumbar area.

WRS0164 WRS0389



FOLDING REAR SEAT

Interior trunk access

The trunk can be accessed from the passengerside of the rear seat for loading and unloading, asshown.

s1 Push down on the button on the rear parcelshelf.

s2 Fold down the passenger side seatback.

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.

WRS0166



To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, reachthrough the opening and pull on the strap s1located behind the seat.

The rear seats can be locked using the masterkey to prevent unauthorized access. The valet keycannot be used to lock or unlock the releasebutton. For more information on keys, refer to“Keys” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section of this manual.

Center armrestPull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENTTo raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,push and hold the lock knob and push the headrestraint down.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-erly as they may provide significant pro-tection against injury in an accident. Donot remove them. Check the adjustmentafter someone else uses the seat.

LRS0225 WRS0167 WRS0133



Adjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of your ears.

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (frontseats)

WARNING

● Always adjust the head restraints prop-erly as specified in the previous section.Failure to do so can reduce the effec-tiveness of the active head restraint.

● Active head restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system canprevent all injuries in any accident.

● Do not attach anything to the head re-straint stalks. Doing so could impairactive head restraint function.

The head restraint moves forward utilizing theforce that the seatback receives from the occu-pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of thehead restraint helps support the occupant’s headby reducing its backward movement and helpingabsorb some of the forces that may lead to whip-lash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active head restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints as de-scribed earlier in this section.

WRS0134 SPA1025



PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat, your chances of being injured or killedin an accident and/or the severity of injury may begreatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encouragesyou and all of your passengers to buckle up everytime you drive, even if your seating position in-cludes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS



WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016



WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● Once the pre-tensioner seat belt hasactivated, it cannot be reused and mustbe replaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system componentsshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

SSS0014



There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear facing child restraint

● Front facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rearfacing child restraints. Front facing child re-straints are available for children who outgrowrear facing child restraints and are at least 1 yearold. Booster seats are used to help position avehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can nolonger use a front facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. See “Child Re-straints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraintsavailable for larger children for additional protec-tion.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

InfantsInfants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Small ChildrenChildren that are over one year old and weighbetween 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs (18 kgs) can be

placed in a forward facing child restraint. Refer tothe manufacturer’s instructions for minimum andmaximum weight and height recommendations.NISSAN recommends that small children beplaced in child restraints that comply with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choosea child restraint that fits your vehicle and alwaysfollow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-lation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should beused to obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt in the child’s seating position fits close tothe face or neck or if the lap portion of the seatbelt goes across the abdomen. The booster seatshould raise the child so that the shoulder belt isproperly positioned across the top, middle por-tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on thehips. A booster seat can only be used in seatingpositions that have a three-point type seat belt.The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and



have a label certifying that it complies with Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the childhas grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on ornear the face and neck, use the shoulder beltwithout the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoareas while the vehicle is moving. Thechild could be seriously injured or killed inan accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,and always position the lap belt as low as pos-sible around the hips, not the waist. Place theshoulder belt over your shoulder and across yourchest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over yourabdominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

s1 Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in thissection.

Manual front seat shownWRS0174



s2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion permits the seat belt tomove, and allows you some freedom ofmovement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Then smoothlypull the belt out of the retractor.

s3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

s4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions three-point seat belts have a lockingmechanism for child restraint installation. It isreferred to as the automatic locking mode or childrestraint mode.

When automatic locking mechanism is activatedthe seat belt cannot be extended again until theseat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and

fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is inthe emergency locking mode. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a passen-ger, the locking mode should not be acti-vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-fortable seat belt tension. It can alsochange the operation of the front passen-ger air bag. See “Front passenger air bagand status light” later in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0137 WRS0138



Unfastening the seat belts

s1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows.

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (Frontseats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)The belt should be away from your face and neck,but not falling off your shoulder.

To adjust the shoulder belt anchor height:

s1 Push in the adjustment button.

WRS0139 WRS0171



s2 Move the shoulder belt anchor to the desiredposition so the belt passes over the center ofthe shoulder. Release the adjustment buttonto lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender is available which iscompatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oflength and may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. See a NISSANdealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply amild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.



PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint can re-sult in serious injury or death.

WARNING

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be usedin the rear seat.

● NISSAN recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

● An improperly installed child restraintcould lead to serious injury or death inan accident.

In general, child restraints are designed to beinstalled with the lap portion of a lap/shoulderseat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped witha universal child restraint lower anchor system,referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system. Some child re-straints include two rigid or webbing-mountedattachments that can be connected to theselower anchors. For details, see the “LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem” later in this section.

Child restraints for infants and small children ofvarious sizes are offered by several manufactur-

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS



ers. When selecting any child restraint, keep thefollowing points in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

WARNING

● Improper use of a child restraint canincrease the risk or severity of injury forboth the child and other occupants ofthe vehicle.

● Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child re-straint, be sure to select one which willfit your child and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install some typesof child restraints in your vehicle.

● If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being in-jured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

● After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the belt holds therestraint in place. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 inch (25mm). If the restraint is not secure,tighten the belt as necessary, or put therestraint in another seat and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint. Not all child restraints fitin all types of vehicles.

● If you must install a front facing childrestraint in the front seat, see “Childrestraint installation on front passengerseat” later in this section.

● When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the childrestraint.



CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONON REAR SEAT CENTER OROUTBOARD POSITIONS

WARNING

● The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision.

● When installing a child restraint systemin the rear center position, both thecenter seat belt connector tongue andbuckle tongue must be secured.

Front facing

When you install a child restraint in the rear seat,follow these steps:

Front Facing (center) — step 1LRS0413

Front Facing (outboard) — step 1LRS0412



s1 Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-structions. The back of the child restraintshould be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint to obtain the correct child restraintfit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier inthis section. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the child restraint isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper child restraint fit,try another seating position or a differentchild restraint.

s2 Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

s3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts back toemergency locking mode when the seat beltis fully retracted.

Front Facing — step 2WRS0250

Front Facing — step 3LRS0458



s4 Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

s5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to push the child restraint fromside to side, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it doesmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull againon the shoulder belt to further tighten thechild restraint. If unable to properly securethe restraint move the restraint to anotherrear seating position and try again , or try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore belt webbing out of the retractor, theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.





Rear facingWhen you install a child restraint in the rear seat,follow these steps:

s1 Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-structions.



Rear Facing (center) — step 1LRS0407

Rear Facing (outboard) — step 1LRS0406

Rear Facing — step 2LRS0408



s3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-gency locking mode when the seat belt isfully retracted.

s4 Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

s5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to push the child restraint fromside to side, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it doesmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull againon the shoulder belt to further tighten thechild restraint. If unable to properly securethe restraint move the restraint to anotherrear seating position and try again , or try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.






6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore seat belt webbing out of the retractor,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If the beltis not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEM

The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) anchor points are located in the seatcushions of the rear outboard seating positionsonly. Do not attempt to install a child restraint inthe center position using the LATCH anchors.

The LATCH system anchors are located at therear of the seat cushion near the seatback. Alabel is attached to the seatback to help youlocate the LATCH system anchors.

WARNING

● Attach LATCH system compatible childrestraints only at the locations shown. Ifa child restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

● Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position using theLATCH system anchors. The child re-straint will not be secured properly.

● The LATCH system anchors are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to two anchors located at certain seatingpositions in your vehicle. This system is known asthe LATCH system. This system may also bereferred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatiblesystem. With this system, you do not have to usea vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.Your vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH system compat-ible child restraints. Check your child restraint fora label stating that it is compatible with the

WRS0440



LATCH system. This information may also be inthe instructions provided by the child restraintmanufacturer. If you have such a child restraint,refer to the illustration for the seating positionsequipped with LATCH system anchors which canbe used to secure the child restraint.

LATCH child restraints generally require the useof a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap childrestraint” later in this section for installation in-structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

When you install a LATCH system compatiblechild restraint to the lower anchor attachments,follow these steps:

WARNING

Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH system an-chors, such as seat belt webbing or seatcushion material. The child restraint willnot be secured properly if the LATCH sys-tem anchors are obstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compatiblechild restraint, insert the child restraintLATCH system anchor attachments into theanchor points on the seat. If the child re-straint is equipped with a top tether, see“Top tether strap child restraint” later in thissection for installation instructions.

2. After attaching the child restraint and beforeplacing the child in it, use force to push thechild restraint from side to side and tug itforward to make sure that the child restraintis securely held in place. It should not movemore than 1 inch (25 mm).

3. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD

RESTRAINT

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it mustbe secured to the provided anchor point. First,secure the child restraint with the rear seat belt.

Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor pointwhich is located directly behind the child seat.Position the top tether strap over the top of theseatback s1 and secure it to the tether anchorbracket that provides the straightest installation.

Tighten the strap according to the manufactur-er’s instructions to remove any slack.

WRS0435



WARNING

Child restraint anchor points are designedto withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.

Anchor point locationsAnchor points are located on the rear parcel shelffinisher.

If you have any questions when installing atop strap child restraint on the rear seat,consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front passengerseat. Supplemental front air bags in-flate with great force. A rear-facingchild restraint could be struck by thesupplemental front air bag in a crashand could seriously injure or kill yourchild.

● NISSAN recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position. Also, be surethe front passenger air bag status lightis illuminated to indicate the passengerair bag is OFF. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this sec-tion for details.

● A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front passen-ger seat.

WRS0256 WRS0378



● The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision. Also, it canchange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. See “Front passengerair bag and status light” later in thissection.

If you must install a child restraint in the front seat,follow these steps:

s1 Position the child restraint on the front pas-senger seat. It should be placed in afront-facing direction only. Move theseat to the rearmost position. Adjust thehead restraint to its highest position. Alwaysfollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions. Child restraints for infantsmust be used in the rear-facing direc-tion and therefore must not be used inthe front seat.

The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seat back. If

necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier inthis section. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the child restraint isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper child restraint fit,try another seating position or a differentchild restraint.






s3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-gency locking mode when the seat belt isfully retracted.

s4 Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull upon the shoulder belt to remove any slack inthe belt.






s5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to push the child restraint fromside to side, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it doesmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull againon the shoulder belt to further tighten thechild restraint. If unable to properly securethe restraint move the restraint to anotherseating position and try again , or try a differ-ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit inall types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore belt webbing out of the retractor, theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 6.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.The passenger air bag status lightshould illuminate. If this light is not illumi-nated see “Front passenger air bag andstatus light” in this section. Move the childrestraint to another seating position.Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTERSEATS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint orbooster seat can result in serious injuryor death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● NISSAN recommends that the boosterseat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.


BOOSTER SEATS



● A booster seat must only be installed ina seating position that has alap/shoulder belt. Failure to use athree-point type seat belt with abooster seat can result in a serious in-jury in sudden stop or collision.

● An improperly installed booster seatcould lead to serious injury or death inan accident.

WARNING

● Do not use towels, books, pillows orother items in place of a booster seat.Items such as these may move duringnormal driving or a collision and resultin serious injury or death. Booster seatsare designed to be used with alap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-signed to properly route the lap andshoulder portions of the seat belt overthe strongest portions of a child’s bodyto provide the maximum protection dur-ing a collision.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if a

LRS0455 LRS0453



low back booster seat s1 is chosen, thevehicle seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seat back islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat s2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with yourchild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

WARNING

● Improper use of a booster seat can in-crease the risk or severity of injury forboth the child and other occupants ofthe vehicle.

● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a booster seat,be sure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be possibleto properly install some types ofbooster seats in your vehicle.

● If the booster seat and seat belt is notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the booster seat, but asupright as possible.

● After placing the child in the boosterseat and fastening the seat belt, makesure the shoulder portion of the belt isaway from the child’s face and neck andthe lap portion of the belt does notcross the abdomen.

● Do not put the shoulder belt behind thechild or under the child’s arm. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation onfront passenger seat” later in thissection.

● When your booster seat is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the boosterseat.

LRS0464



BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ONREAR SEAT CENTER OROUTBOARD POSITIONS

CAUTION

Do not use a lap/shoulder belt automaticlocking mode when using a booster seatwith the seat belts. When you install abooster seat in the rear seat follow thesesteps:

1. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

2. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-sary, adjust or remove the head restraint toobtain the correct booster seat fit. See“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in thissection. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the booster seat isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper booster seat fit,try another seating position or a differentbooster seat.

3. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the belt routing.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting thebelt routing.

5. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in the “Three-point seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

Outboard positionLRS0452

Center positionLRS0451



BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ONFRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

NISSAN recommends that child restraintsbe installed in the rear seat. However, ifyou must install a booster seat in the frontpassenger seat, move the passenger’sseat to the rearmost position.

If you must install a booster seat in the front seat,follow these steps:

1. Move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-sary, adjust or remove the head restraint toobtain the correct booster seat fit. See“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in thissection. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the booster seat isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper booster seat fit,try another seating position or a differentbooster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting thebelt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in the “Three-point seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

7. When the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition, the passenger air bag statuslight may or may not be illuminated,depending on the size of the child and thetype of booster seat being used. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

LRS0454



PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe driver and passenger supplemental front airbags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System),supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system:The NISSAN advanced air bag system can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Supplemental side-impact air bag system(if so equipped): This system can help cushionthe impact force to the chest and pelvic area ofthe driver and front passenger in certain sideimpact collisions. The supplemental side air bagis designed to inflate on the side where thevehicle is impacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact air bagsystem (if so equipped): This system can helpcushion the impact force to the head of occu-pants in front and rear outboard seating positionsin certain side impact collisions. The curtain side-impact air bags are designed to inflate on the sidewhere the vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the driver and front passenger seat beltsand are not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and the occu-pant seated a suitable distance away from thesteering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section forinstructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM



WARNING

● The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, rollover, orlower severity frontal collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

● The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat. The front air bags inflate withgreat force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre-strained, leaning forward, sitting side-ways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the supplementalfront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. Theadvanced air bag system monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

WRS0031



● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front Passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when thesupplemental front air bag inflates.

ARS1133



WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043



WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags, side air bags or curtain side-impact air bags inflate if they are notproperly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-dren should be properly restrained inthe rear seat, if possible.

ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046



● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. See“Child restraints” earlier in this sectionfor details.

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag (if so equipped):

● The supplemental side air bag and cur-tain side-impact air bag ordinarily willnot inflate in the event of a frontal im-pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se-verity side collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

Do not lean against the door.

SSS0101

Do not lean against the door.

SSS0188



WARNING

● The seat belts, the supplemental sideair bags and curtain side-impact airbags are most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in the seat.The side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag inflate with great force. Do notallow anyone to place their hand, leg orface near the side air bag on the side ofthe seatback of the front seat or nearthe side roof rails. Do not allow anyonesitting in the front seats or rear out-board seats to extend their hand out ofthe window or lean against the door.Some examples of dangerous ridingpositions are shown in the previousillustrations.

WARNING

● When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the front seat.If the side air bag inflates, you may beseriously injured. Be especially carefulwith children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withsupplemental side air bag inflation.

WRS0032 SSS0159



1. SRS curtain side-impact air bag mod-ules (if so equipped)

2. SRS curtain side-impact air bags (if soequipped)

3. Supplemental side air bag modules (ifso equipped)

4. Diagnosis sensor unit5. Supplemental front air bag modules6. Crash zone sensor7. Occupant classification system control

unit

SSS0162

WRS0466



8. Seat belt buckle switches on driver’sand passenger’s side

9. Occupant classification sensor (pres-sure sensor)

10. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor11. Side satellite sensor12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad-vanced air bag system for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.

The driver supplemental front air bag is located inthe center of the steering wheel. The passengersupplemental front air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box. The supplemen-tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental front air bagsystem operation.

The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit,seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seatbelt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based onthe severity of a collision and seat belt usage forthe driver. For the front passenger, it additionallymonitors the weight of an occupant or object onthe seat and seat belt tension. Based on informa-tion from the sensors, only one front air bag mayinflate in a crash, depending on the crash severityand whether the front occupants are belted orunbelted. Additionally, the front passenger airbag may be automatically turned OFF undersome conditions, depending on the weight de-tected on the passenger seat and how the seatbelt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will notbe illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See“Front passenger air bag and status light” later inthis section for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper performanceof the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN

dealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag inflates, afairly loud noise may be heard, followed by therelease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful anddoes not indicate a fire. Care should be taken tonot inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-ing. Those with a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants. Theycan help save lives and reduce serious injuries.However, an inflating front air bag may causefacial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thesupplemental front air bags inflate quickly in orderto help protect the front occupants. Because ofthis, the force of the front air bag inflating canincrease the risk of injury if the occupant is tooclose to, or is against, the front air bag moduleduring inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.



The supplemental front air bags operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.


Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light islocated under the climate controls. The light op-erates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The isOFF and the front passenger air bag is OFFand will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The illuminates to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is OFF andwill not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meets the conditions outlined in thissection: The light is OFF to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is opera-tional.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the frontpassenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

LRS0316



to certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is designed todetect an occupant and objects on the seat byweight. It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child is in thefront passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys-tem is designed to turn the passenger air bagOFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if achild restraint of the type specified in the regula-tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’sweight can be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-tion can vary depending on the front passengerseat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the automatic locking mode (child restraintmode). Based on the weight on the seat detectedby the occupant classification sensor and the belttension detected on the seat belt, the advancedair bag system determines whether the front pas-senger air bag should be automatically turnedOFF as required by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF, however if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode), this couldcause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always besure to be seated and wearing the seat beltproperly for the most effective protection by theseat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor and seat belt sensors aredesigned to operate as described above to turnthe front passenger air bag OFF for specifiedchild restraints as required by the regulations.Failing to properly secure child restraints and touse the automatic locking mode (child restraintmode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in anaccident or sudden stop. This can also result inthe passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead

of being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in thissection for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If thepassenger air bag status light is not illuminated(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a



crash), it could be that the child restraint or seatbelt is not being used properly. In rare cases, thepassenger air bag status light will not illuminateeven though the air bag is OFF.

If such situations happen, properly position andrestrain the occupant or child restraint. Other-wise reposition the occupant or child restraint ina rear seat. If you have any questions aboutwhether your passenger air bag is working asdesigned, your NISSAN dealer can confirm that itis working properly by using a special tool.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. For example, if alarge adult who is sitting in the front passengerseat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagstatus light will go from OFF to ON for a fewseconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemoperation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges areain the center of the instrument panel, will blink.Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front air bag precau-tions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the supplemen-tal front air bag inflates.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe supplemental front air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental frontair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly by placingmaterial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel or byinstalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (pressure sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thesupplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the seat belt systemmay result in serious personal injury.



● Work on and around the supplementalfront air bag system should be done bya NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-cal equipment should also be done by aNISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring should notbe modified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

● The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental front airbag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Supplemental side-impact air bag andcurtain side-impact air bags system (ifso equipped)

The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo-cated in the outside of the seatback of the frontseats. The supplemental curtain side-impact airbags are located in the side roof rails. Thesesystems are designed to meet voluntary guide-lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the infor-mation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may inflateif the forces in another type of collision are similarto those of a higher severity side impact. They aredesigned to inflate on the side where the vehicleis impacted. They may not inflate in certain sidecollisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise maybe heard, followed by release of smoke. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe chest and pelvic area of the front occupants.Curtain side-impact air bags help to cushion theimpact force to the head of occupants in the frontand rear outboard seating positions. They canhelp save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag may cause abrasions or otherinjuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact air bags do not provide restraint tothe lower body.

LRS0259



The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the supplemental side airbag. Rear seat passengers should be seated asfar away as practical from the door finishers andside roof rails. The side air bags and curtainside-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag inflating can increase the risk of injury ifthe occupant is too close to, or is against, theseair bag modules during inflation. The side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.

The supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or START posi-tions.


WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if the supplemental side airbag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systemcomponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag system. This is to prevent acci-dental inflation of the side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag or damageto the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thesupplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental sideair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial near the seatbacks or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, around the side air bag.

● Work around and on the curtain air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag or cur-tain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag system andguide the buyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner’s Manual.



Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot bereused after activation. It must be re-placed together with the retractor andbuckle as a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but the pre-tensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by your NISSANdealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt system. Thisis to prevent accidental activation ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt or damageto the pre-tensioner seat belt operation.Tampering with the pre-tensioner seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Work around and on the pre-tensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pre-tensioner seatbelt system.

● If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensionerdisposal procedures are set forth in theappropriate NISSAN Service Manual.Incorrect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt systemactivates in conjunction with the supplemental airbag systems. Working with the seat belt retrac-tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehiclebecomes involved in certain types of collisions,helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’sretractor. These seat belts are used the same asconventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated,load limiters allow the seat belt to release web-bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against thechest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensionersystem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will not come on, will flash intermit-tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain onafter the ignition key has been turned to the ON orSTART position. In this case, the pre-tensionerseat belt may not function properly. They must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem and guide the buyer to the appropriatesections in this Owner’s Manual.



1. SRS air bag warning labels2. SRS side air bag warning label (if so

equipped)SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front airbag systems are placed in the vehicle as shownin the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag (if so equipped) and pre-tensionerseat belt systems. The circuits monitored by thesupplemental air bag warning light are the diag-nosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, satellitesensors, front air bag modules, side air bag mod-ules, curtain side-impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bag, supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag (if soequipped) and pre-tensioner seat belt systemsneed servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental frontair bag, supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact air bag (if so equipped) or pre-tensioner seat belt systems may not operateproperly. It must be checked and repaired. Takeyour vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WRS0169 LRS0100



WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain side-impact air bag systems (if soequipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat beltsystems will not operate in an accident. Tohelp avoid injury to yourself or others,have your vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplementalside air bags, curtain side-impact air bags (if soequipped) and pre-tensioner seat belts are de-signed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As areminder, unless it is damaged, the supplementalair bag warning light remains illuminated afterinflation has occurred. Repair and replacement ofthese supplemental air bag systems should bedone only by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple-mental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags(if so equipped), pre-tensioner seat belts andrelated parts should be pointed out to the personperforming the maintenance. The ignition keyshould always be in the LOCK position whenworking under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag or curtainside-impact air bag has inflated, the airbag module will not function again andmust be replaced. Additionally, if any ofthe supplemental front air bags inflate,the activated pre-tensioner seat beltsmust also be replaced. The air bag mod-ule and pre-tensioner seat belt systemshould be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.The air bag module and pre-tensionerseat belt system cannot be repaired.

● The supplemental front air bag, side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-tems, and the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem should be inspected by aNISSAN dealer if there is any damage tothe front end or side portion of thevehicle.

● If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat beltsystem or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct supplementalair bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem disposal procedures are set forth inthe appropriate NISSAN ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.




MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-9Voltmeter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Fuel consumption gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-10

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-11Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-24Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Traction control system (TCS) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Cigarette lighter and ashtray (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-29Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Instrument panel storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-34Covered storage box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Grocery hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36


Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Sunroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Automatic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42HomeLinkT universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-42

Programming HomeLinkT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Programming HomeLinkT for Canadiancustomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Operating the HomeLinkT universaltransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Rolling code programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button . . . . . . 2-45If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45


1. Driver, center and passenger ventila-tors (P. 4-11)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turnsignal switch (P. 2-21)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) (P. 4-40)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn(P. 1-34, 2-26)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)6. Cruise control main/set switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-15)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-19)8. Storage (if so equipped) (P. 2-30)9. Glove box (P. 2-33)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-34)11. Heater and air conditioner (manual or

automatic) (P. 4-11, P. 4-20)12. Power outlet or cigarette lighter

(if so equipped) (P. 2-28, P. 2-29)13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-27)14. Shift selector lever (P. 5-7)15. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-26)16. Storage or ashtray (if so equipped)

(P. 2-30, P .2-29)WIC0902

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls


17. Front passenger air bag status light(P. 1-43)

18. Audio system controls (if so equipped)(P. 4-23)

19. Ignition switch (P. 5-4)20. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls

(P. 3-13)21. Traction control system (TCS) off

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-28)22. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-24)23. Trunk opener (P. 3-10)24. Meters and gauges (if so equipped)

(P. 2-3)25. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)26. Navigation system* controls

(if so equipped) (P. 4-2)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual.


1. Tachometer2. Warning/indicator lights3. Speedometer4. Engine coolant temperature gauge5. Fuel gauge

6. Odometer/twin trip odometer/trip com-puter (if so equipped)

LIC0681

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3


Triple meter (if so equipped):1. Fuel consumption gauge2. Engine oil pressure gauge3. Voltmeter

1. Speedometer2. Odometer/twin trip display3. Change button

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed inmiles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour(km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer (if soequipped)The odometer/twin trip odometer (if so equipped)is displayed when the ignition key is in the ONposition.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer (if so equipped) recordsthe distance of individual trips.

LIC0746 LIC0682



Changing the display:

For vehicles equipped with trip computer andwithout navigation system, pushing the changebutton changes the display as follows:

Trip → Trip → Outside temperature→ Distance to Empty → Average economy →Average speed → Elapsed time → Trip

For additional information, refer to “Trip com-puter” later in this section.

For vehicles equipped with trip computer andnavigation system, pushing the change buttonchanges the display as follows:

Trip → Trip → Outside temperature→ Trip

For vehicles with navigation system, refer to“How to use the ’trip’ button” in the “Displayscreen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys-tems” section later in this manual.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-ond resets the trip odometer to zero.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)The display of the trip computer is situated in thespeedometer display. When the ignition is turnedto ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the tripcomputer and then shows the mode chosen be-fore the ignition switch is turned OFF.

Display without navigation systemWIC0601

Display with navigation systemLIC0719



When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modesof the trip computer can be selected by pushingthe trip button on the steering wheel switch foraudio controls or by the trip computer changebutton located near the speedometer. The fol-lowing modes can be selected:

Outside air temperature (ICY-°F or °C)The outside air temperature is displayed in °F or°C.

The outside air temperature mode includes a lowtemperature warning feature: below 37°F (3°C),the outside air temperature mode is automaticallyselected and ICY will illuminate in order to drawthe driver’s attention. Press the trip or change

button to toggle to the next mode, if desired. TheICY indicator will remain illuminated as long asthe temperature remains below 39°F (4°C).

The ambient temperature sensor is located infront of the radiator. The sensor may be affectedby road or engine heat, wind directions and otherdriving conditions. The display may differ from theactual ambient temperature or the temperaturedisplayed on various signs or billboards.

Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in thefuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warningfeature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode isautomatically selected and the digits blink in or-der to draw the driver’s attention. Press the trip orchange button if you wish to return to the modethat was selected before the warning occurred.The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until thevehicle is refueled.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dtedisplay will change to (----).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while theignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-play just before the ignition switch isturned OFF may continue to be dis-played.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves,the fuel in the tank shifts, which maymomentarily change the display.

Average fuel consumption (mpg orl/100km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows theaverage fuel consumption since the last reset.Resetting is done by pressing the trip or changebutton for more than approximately 1 second.The display is updated every 30 seconds. Atabout the first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, thedisplay shows (----).

Average speed (mph or km/h)

The average speed mode shows the averagevehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is doneby pressing the trip or change button for morethan approximately 1 second. The display is up-dated every 30 seconds. The first 30 secondsafter a reset, the display shows (----).

LIC0683



Journey timeThe journey time mode shows the time since thelast reset. The displayed time can be reset bypressing the trip or change button for more thanapproximately 1 second.

NOTE:

If a low temperature warning and low rangewarning occur simultaneously, other dis-play modes switch automatically to theoutside temperature display.

TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine intothe red zone s1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause seriousengine damage.

Type ALIC0684

Type BLIC0715



ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range s1 when the gauge needle pointswithin the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

LIC0685 LIC0686



The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function indicator light (MIL)” later inthis section. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if

so equipped)

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-tem oil pressure while the engine is running.When the engine speed is high, the engine oilpressure is also high. When the engine speed islow, the gauge may indicate low oil pressure.

CAUTION

● This gauge is not designed to indicatelow engine oil level. Use the dipstick tocheck the oil level. (See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.)

● If the gauge needle does not move withthe proper amount of engine oil, havethe vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer. Continued vehicle operation insuch a condition could cause seriousdamage to the engine.

Type ALIC0749

Type BLIC0752



VOLTMETER (if so equipped)When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-tion, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage.When the engine is running, it indicates the gen-erator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop belowthe normal range. If the needle is not in the normalrange (12 - 14.5 volts) s1 while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the charging systemis not functioning properly. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

FUEL CONSUMPTION GAUGE (if soequipped)This gauge shows the APPROXIMATE fuel con-sumption while you are driving.

The vehicle speed must be 7 mph (11.2 km/h) orgreater for the gauge to give a reading.

LIC0750Type A

LIC0751

Type BLIC0803



or Anti-lock braking warning light(if so equipped)

Low windshield washer fluid warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Automatic transmission check warning light(if so equipped)

Seat belt warning light and chime High beam indicator light (Blue)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Charge warning light Trunk lid open warning light Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Door open warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light(A/T models)

Traction control system off indicator light(if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light CRUISE main switch indicator light(if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light Cruise SET switch indicator light(if so equipped)

CHECKING BULBSWith all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key to the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then gooff:

or , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING LIGHTSor Anti-lock braking

warning light (if soequipped)

If the light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the anti-lock braking system is notfunctioning properly. Have the system checkedby a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS



If a malfunction occurs in the system, the anti-lock function is turned off, but the regular brakingsystem continues to operate.

If the light comes on while you are driving,contact a NISSAN dealer for repair.

Automatic transmission checkwarning light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the lightcomes on for about 2 seconds. If the light comeson at any other time, it may indicate the automatictransmission system is not functioning properly.Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight warns of a low brake fluid level. If the lightcomes on while the engine is running with theparking brake not applied, stop the vehicle andperform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are notclosed securely while the ignition key is in the ONposition.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use the



dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuelin the tank when the fuel gauge needlereaches E (Empty).

Low windshield washer fluidwarning light

This light comes on when the windshield washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluidas necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition key is turned to the ON or START positionand remains illuminated until the driver’s seat beltis fastened. At the same time, the chime soundsfor about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat beltis securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied (ifso equipped). For 5 seconds after the ignitionswitch is in the ON position, the system does notactivate the warning light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bag, supplemental side airbag (if so equipped), curtain side-impact air bags

(if so equipped), and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tems need servicing and your vehicle must betaken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioner seat belts may not function properly.For additional details see “Supplemental restraintsystem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag (ifso equipped), curtain side-impact air bagsystems (if so equipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not oper-ate in an accident. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.



Trunk lid open warning light

This light comes on when the trunk lid is notsecurely closed while the ignition key is in the ONposition.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmissionposition indicator light (A/Tmodels)

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-tion, this indicator light shows the automatictransmission selector lever position. See “Drivingthe vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight (if so equipped)

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight (if so equipped)

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicate

the cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

Front passenger air bagstatus light

The front passenger air bag status light ( )will be lit and the passenger front air bag will beOFF depending on how the front passenger seatis being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction indicator light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also come onsteady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or ifthe vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make surethe fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly,and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction indicator light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. Ifthe fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tightenor install the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The light should turn off aftera few driving trips. If the light does notturn off after a few driving trips, have the



vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. Youdo not need to have your vehicle towed tothe dealer.

● Malfunction indicator light blinking — An en-gine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspectedby a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Slip indicator light (if soequipped)

This indicator light will blink when the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin. Slipperyroad conditions may exist if the slip indicatorblinks on. If this happens, adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when youturn the ignition key to the ON position. The lightwill turn off after about 2 seconds if the system isoperational. If the light does not come on or doesnot go off, have the traction control systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

Traction control system offindicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the tractioncontrol off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi-cates the traction control system is not operating.

Push the traction control off switch again or re-start the engine and the system will operate nor-mally. See “Traction control system (TCS)” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The traction control light also comes on when youturn the ignition key to the ON position. The lightwill turn off after about 2 seconds if the tractioncontrol system (TCS) is operational. If the lightstays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica-

tor light while you are driving, have the tractioncontrol system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the traction control system is operating,you might feel slight vibration or hear the systemworking when starting the vehicle or accelerat-ing, but this is normal.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.



Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch in the OFF position, achime sounds when the driver’s door is opened ifthe headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-tems:

● Vehicle security system (if so equipped)

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if soequipped)

The vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorsor trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,however, a motion detection type system thatactivates when a vehicle is moved or when avibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-ways secure your vehicle even if parking for abrief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the trunk lid and all doors. Lock alldoors. The doors can be locked with the key,power door lock switch (if the door isopened, locked, and then closed) or with thekeyfob.

Keyfob operation:

LIC0301

SECURITY SYSTEMS



● Push the button on the keyfob.All doors lock. The hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once to indicateall doors are locked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

For vehicles with navigation system, see9Vehicle electronic systems9 in the 9Displayscreen, heater, air conditioner and audiosystems9 section later in this manual. Forvehicles without navigation system, see 9Si-lencing the horn beep feature9 in the 9Pre-driving checks and adjustments9 sectionlater in this manual.

4. Confirm that the security indicator lightcomes on. The security light stays on forabout 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-onds the vehicle security system automati-cally shifts into the armed phase. Thesecurity light begins to flash once every 3seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-armtime period, the driver’s door is unlocked bythe key or the keyfob, or the ignition key isturned to ACC or ON, the system will notarm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe driver’s door, the system may notarm. Furthermore, if the key is turnedbeyond the vertical position toward theunlock position to remove the key, thesystem may be disarmed when the keyis removed. If the indicator light fails toglow for 30 seconds, unlock the dooronce and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors and trunk lid closedand locked with the ignition key in theOFF position.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after ap-proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by unlockingthe driver’s door or trunk lid with the key, orby pressing the button on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening the door or trunk lid without usingthe key or keyfob (even if the door is un-locked by releasing the door inside lockswitch).

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’sdoor or the trunk lid with the key, or by pressingthe button on the keyfob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.



4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light (NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System)

The security indicator light s1 is located on theinstrument panel near the windshield.

The security indicator light blinks every 3 sec-onds whenever the ignition switch is in theLOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indi-cates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System isoperational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allkeys that you have when visiting yourNISSAN dealer for service.

WIC0270



SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer switch oper-ates when the ignition key is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

s1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can beadjusted by turning the knob toward sA(Slower) or sB (Faster). Also, for vehiclesequipped with speed dependent wipers, theintermittent operation speed varies in accor-dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-tent operation speed will be faster.)

NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the speed de-pendent wiper function (if so equipped).Refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve-hicles with navigation system) in the “Dis-play screen, heater, air conditioner and au-dio systems” section later in this manual.

s2 Low — continuous low speed operation

s3 High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up s4 to have one sweep opera-tion of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.WIC0854

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH



To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light on theswitch comes on. Push the switch again to turnthe defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

NOTE:

The top few rows of wires on the rear win-dow are not part of the rear window de-froster system. These wires make up theantenna for the audio system.

Type ALIC0720

Type BLIC0689

Type CWIC0725

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH



XENON HEADLIGHTS (if soequipped)

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

● When xenon headlights are on, theyproduce a high voltage. To prevent anelectric shock, never attempt to modifyor disassemble. Always have your xe-non headlights replaced at a NISSANdealer.

● Xenon headlights provide considerablymore light than conventional head-lights. If they are not correctly aimed,they might temporarily blind an oncom-ing driver or the driver ahead of you andcause a serious accident. If headlightsare not aimed correctly, immediatelytake your vehicle to a NISSAN dealerand have the headlights adjustedcorrectly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, itsbrightness or color varies slightly. However, thecolor and brightness will soon stabilize.

● The life of xenon headlights will beshortened by frequent on-off opera-tion. It is generally desirable not to turnoff the headlights for short intervals

(for example, when the vehicle stops ata traffic signal). Even when the daytimerunning lights are active (Canada only),the xenon headlights do not turn on.This way the life of the xenon head-lights is not reduced.

● If the xenon headlight bulb is close toburning out, the brightness will drasti-cally decrease, the light will start blink-ing, or the color of the light will be-come reddish. If one or more of theabove signs appear, contact a NISSANdealer.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

s1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

s2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

Type ALIC0560

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH



CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds afteryou turn the key to OFF and all doors areclosed.

Type BLIC0687

Type CLIC0688 LIC0561



NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and thetime delay for autolight shutoff is adjust-able for vehicles with navigation system.See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems”section later in this manual.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion s1 .

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and adoor is opened and left open, the headlightsremain ON for 5 minutes. If another door isopened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minutetimer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch tothe OFF, , or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor s1 located on the topside of the instrument panel. The autolightsensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it isdark out and the headlights will illuminate.If this occurs while parked with the engineoff and the key in the ON position, yourvehicle’s battery could become discharged.

Headlight beam select

s1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

s2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

s3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is turned OFF while theheadlight switch is in the or posi-tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

WIC0274 LIC0562



CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-tion switch is in ON position.

The instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is in theAUTO, or position.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-ment panel lights when driving at night.

The instrument brightness control will not adjustthe brightness when the headlights or parkinglights are off.

LIC0392



TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

s1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

s2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switchin the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch tothe position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

LIC0563 LIC0564



Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchin any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

LIC0394 LIC0395

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH

HORN



The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (ifso equipped). The switches are located on thecenter console.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the low or high position of the switch,as desired, depending on the temperature.The indicator light in the switch will illumi-nate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switchoff.

CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

● If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

LIC0690

HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)



The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con-trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCSreduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.The engine speed will be reduced even if theaccelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximumengine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the TCS off.

To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch.The indicator will come on.

Push the TCS OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn ON the system. See “Traction con-trol system (TCS)” in the “Starting and driving”section.

The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones. Theyare rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● Only certain power outlets are designedfor use with a cigarette lighter unit. Donot use any other power outlet for anaccessory lighter. See your NISSANdealer for additional information.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

LIC0451Instrument panel (if so equipped)

LIC0714

ConsoleWIC0699

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

POWER OUTLET



● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

The cigarette lighter operates when the ignitionswitch is in the ACC or ON position.

Lift the lid sA to open.

Push the lighter sB in all the way. When thelighter is heated, it will spring out. Return thelighter to its original position after use.

Pull out the ashtray sC to remove it.

This power outlet can also be used for poweringelectrical accessories such as cellular tele-phones.

CAUTION

● The cigarette lighter should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● Do not use any other power outlet for anaccessory lighter.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

LIC0692

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY(if so equipped)



● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

MAP POCKETSSEATBACK POCKETS (if soequipped)The seatback pockets are located on the back ofthe driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pocketscan be used to store maps.

WIC0700

Type ALIC0016

STORAGE



SUNGLASSES HOLDERTo open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING

● The sunglasses holder should not beused while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

● Keep the sunglasses holder closedwhile driving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

Type BWIC0747 WIC0609



CUP HOLDERSTo open the front cup holders, push the cupholder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid andpush down until it clicks in place.

The plastic insert may be removed for cleaning.

The rear cup holders are located in the fold-downarmrest in the rear seat back.

The rubber insert may be removed for cleaning.

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

FrontWIC0691

RearWRS0167



GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle. Use themaster key when locking s1 or unlocking s2 theglove box. The valet key cannot be used to lock orunlock the glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

WARNING

The center console box should not beused while driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

Upper half

Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open theupper half of the console box. The felt mat may beremoved for cleaning.

The upper half of the console box may be used forstorage of cellular phones. An access hole isprovided at the rear of the upper half of theconsole box for phone cord routing to the poweroutlet.

To route a phone cord to the power outlet:

1. Open the upper half of the console box.

2. Remove the felt mat, and then remove thecutout area from the mat.

WIC0374 LIC0701



3. Remove the access hole cover.

4. Install the felt mat.

5. Route the phone cord through the accesshole and plug into the power outlet.

Lower halfPull up on the passenger’s side latch to open thelower half of the console box. A power outlet islocated inside the console box and there is stor-age for compact discs.

INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE (ifso equipped)

To open the storage tray, push upward and re-lease. The storage tray will automatically move tothe open position.

LIC0702

LIC0703



● The inside of the storage tray can get hot. Donot place objects inside which can melt orbe easily deformed.

WARNING

● The storage tray should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

● Keep the tray lid closed while driving tohelp prevent contents from becomingprojectiles causing injury in an accidentor during a sudden stop.

COVERED STORAGE BOX (if soequipped)Push the bottom center of the lid to open.

If so equippedLIC0721 LIC0694



GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)The grocery hooks are located in the trunk andcan be used to hang a standard size plasticgrocery bag.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 20lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.

LIC0748

WIC0733



CARGO NET (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

● Be sure to secure all four hooks into theretainers. The cargo restrained in thenet must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) orthe net may not stay secured.

CAUTION

Do not strike the navigation system mapDVD-ROM player (if so equipped) whileloading the trunk and do not place heavyobjects on the player. Doing so couldcause improper operation or damage thesystem.

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargoarea from moving around while the vehicle is inmotion.

To install the cargo net, attach the net to theretainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the net from thecargo net retainers.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position, or for about 45seconds after the ignition switch is turned to theOFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the windows is canceled.

LIC0802

WINDOWS



1. Power door lock switch2. Window lock button3. Front passenger side (automatic switch,

if so equipped)4. Right rear passenger side5. Left rear passenger side6. Driver side automatic switchDriver’s side power window switchThe driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold itdown. To close a window, pull the switch up. Tostop the opening or closing function at any time,simply release the switch.

Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch and hold it down s1 .To close the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Rear power window switchThe rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down s1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

LIC0705 LIC0695 LIC0718



Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down (onlydriver’s side shown) to the second detent andrelease it; it need not be held. The window auto-matically opens all the way. To stop the window,lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held.

Auto-reverse functionIf the control unit detects something caught in thewindow as it is closing, the window will be imme-diately lowered.

The auto-reverse function can be activated whenthe window is closed by automatic operationwhen the ignition key is in the ON position or for45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to theOFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof will only operate when the ignitionkey is in the ON position. The automatic sunroofis operational for about 45 seconds, even if theignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF position.If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Sliding the sunroofTo fully open the sunroof, push the switch towardthe position s1 .

To fully close the sunroof, push and hold theswitch toward the position s2 .

LIC0717 LIC0679

SUNROOF (if so equipped)



To open the sunroof part way, push the switch inany direction while the sunroof is sliding open tostop it in the desired position.

To close the sunroof part way, push and hold theswitch until the sunroof is in the desired position.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt the sunroof up, push the tilt switch tothe position s3 .

To tilt the sunroof down, push and hold the tiltswitch to the position s4 .

Restarting the sunroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable afterthe battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormalitydetected. Use the following reset procedure toreturn sunroof operation to normal.

1. From any sunroof position (fully open, par-tially open, closed, partially vented orvented), push and hold the tilt switch towardthe position s3 until the sunroof ventsin the full-up position.

The sunroof should now operate normally.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open sunroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe sunroof opening while the vehicle isin motion or while the sunroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the sunroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on the sun-roof or surrounding area.

SunshadeOpen and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.

If the sunroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair thesunroof.

The interior light has a three-position switch andoperates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position s1 , theinterior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutesunless the ignition key is in the ACC or ONposition.

When the switch is in the center O position, theinterior lights will stay on for about 30 secondswhen:

● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob (if soequipped), a key or the power door lockswitch while all doors are closed and theignition switch is in the OFF position.

WIC0264

INTERIOR LIGHT



● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer isactivated when:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob (ifso equipped), a key, or the power door lockswitch.

● The ignition switch is turned ON.

When the switch is in the OFF position s2 , theinterior lights do not illuminate, regardless of doorposition.

The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-utes while doors are open to prevent the batteryfrom becoming discharged.

NOTE:

The door step lights illuminate when thedriver and passenger doors are open re-gardless of the interior light switch posi-tion. These lights will turn off automaticallyafter about 30 minutes while doors areopen to prevent the battery from becomingdischarged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

To turn the map lights on, press the switches. Toturn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

Models without sunroofWIC0289

MAP LIGHTS



The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

The light will go off after about 30 minutes if thetrunk lid is left open, unless the ignition key is inthe ACC or ON position.

For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver provides aconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters intoone built-in device.

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks and se-curity systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLinkT will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. Foradditional information refer to “Program-ming HomeLinkT” later in this section.

Models with sunroofLIC0696

TRUNK LIGHT HOMELINKT UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)



WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot detectan object in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT

1. With the ignition key in the OFF position,press and hold the two outside buttons, andrelease when the indicator light begins toflash (after 20 seconds). This procedureerases the factory set default codes anddoes not have to be followed when program-ming additional hand-held transmitters.

2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter(from the device you wish to train) approxi-mately 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away fromthe surface of HomeLinkT keeping the indi-cator light in view.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously push thehand-held transmitter button and the de-sired HomeLinkT button. Do not release thebuttons until step 4 has been completed.

NOTE:

Some garage door openers may require theprocedures noted under “Canadian Pro-gramming.”

4. The HomeLinkT indicator will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight flashes rapidly, both buttons may bereleased. The rapid flashing light indicatesthe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver hasbeen successfully programmed.

To program the remaining two buttons, followsteps 2 through 4.

If , after repeated attempts, you do not success-fully program the HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver to learn the signal of the hand-held trans-mitter, refer to “Rolling Code Programming” laterin this section.

If you have any questions or are having difficultyprogramming your HomeLinkT buttons, refer tothe HomeLinkT web site at: www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

WIC0291



PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toHomeLinkT, continue to press and hold theHomeLinkT button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLinkT”) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-sible damage to the garage door openercomponents.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKTUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-propriate programmed HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver button. The red indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLinkT surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLinkT andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLinkT is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition – keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment. The phone numbers are located inthe Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,to clear all programming, press and hold the twooutside buttons and release when the indicatorlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMINGRolling code garage door openers (or other roll-ing code devices) which are “code protected”and manufactured after 1996, may be deter-mined by the following:

● Reference the garage door opener Owner’sManual for verification.

● The hand-held transmitter appears to pro-gram the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverbut does not activate the garage door.

● Press and hold the trained HomeLinkT but-ton. If the garage door opener has the rollingcode feature, the HomeLinkT indicator lightwill flash rapidly, then remains on after 2seconds.

To program the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverto a garage door opener with the rolling codefeature, follow these instructions after completingthe “Programming HomeLink” (the aid of a sec-ond person may make the following proceduresquicker and easier).



1. Locate the training button on the garagedoor opener motor unit. Exact location andcolor of the button may vary by garage dooropener brand. If there is difficulty locatingthe training button, reference the garagedoor opener Owner’s Manual.

2. Press the training button on the garage dooropener motor unit (which may activate atraining light).

NOTE:

Following step 2, there are 30 seconds inwhich to initiate step 3.

3. Firmly press and release the programmedHomeLinkT button a second time to com-plete the training process. (Some garagedoor openers may require you to do thisprocedure a third time to complete the train-ing.)

The garage door opener should now recognizethe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver and acti-vate when the HomeLinkT button is pressed. Theremaining two buttons may now be programmed(if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4in the “Programming HomeLinkT” proceduresearlier in this section).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINKT BUTTONTo reprogram a HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverbutton, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT but-ton. Do not release the button until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76mm) away from the HomeLinkT surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight begins to flash rapidly, release bothbuttons.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver button hasnow been reprogrammed. The new device canbe activated by pushing the HomeLinkT buttonthat was just programmed. This procedure willnot affect any other programmed HomeLinkTbuttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENIf your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult theOwner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalinformation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLinkT Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) This de-vice must accept any interference that maybe received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D. CV2V67690




MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Nissan vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-5How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Key operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Tilting telescopic steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15


1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-der chip and chrome NISSAN brandsymbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip(if so equipped)

3. Key number plate4. Transponder chipA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the masteror valet keys which are registered to the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System components in yourvehicle. These keys have a transponder chip inthe key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the trunk lid,glove box lock or rear seatback lock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key withsomeone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as five NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedwith one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have toyour NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-

cause the registration process will erase thememory of all key codes previously registeredinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.After the registration process, these componentswill only recognize keys coded into the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System during registration.Any key that is not given to your dealer at the timeof registration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

WPD0128

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front s1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral s3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors s4 .

Opening and closing windows (if soequipped)The driver’s door key operation allows you toopen and close windows equipped with auto-matic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

● To close the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the front of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is locked.

Driver’s sideWPD0129

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3


LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock to the lock position s1 , then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position s2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side), tothe lock position s1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position s2 .

Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition and any dooropen, all doors will lock and unlock automatically.This helps to prevent the keys from being acci-dently locked inside the vehicle.

Inside lockWPD0291

Door lock switchLPD0292



CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCKChild safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn theinterior light on, and activate the panic alarm byusing the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigationsystem, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”later in this section. For vehicles with navigationsystem, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” inthe “Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems” section later in this manual.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effectivedistance depends upon the conditions aroundthe vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of that key-fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-authorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

APD1010

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM(if so equipped)



HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood, trunk lid, and all doors.

4. Push the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once to indicate alldoors are locked.

● When the button is pushed with alldoors locked, the hazard lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once as a reminder thatthe doors are already locked.

● If a door is open and you push thebutton, the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard lights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep once. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” later in thissection for details.

Unlocking doors

Push the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doorsare completely closed with the ignition key inany position except the ON position.

● The interior light turns on and the light timeractivates for 30 seconds when the switch isin the center O position with the ignition keyin any position except the ON position.

Push the button on the keyfob again within5 seconds.

LPD0209 LPD0210


Z REVIEW COPY—2006 Altima (l30)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)03/03/06—debbie X

● All doors unlock.

● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doorsare completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into theignition and turning to the ON or START position,locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing theinterior light switch to the OFF position.

Auto relockWhen the button on the keyfob is pushed,all doors will lock automatically within 1 minuteunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe key is turned from OFF to ON.

Releasing the trunk lidPush the button on the keyfob for longerthan 0.5 second to open the trunk lid. The trunkrelease button on the keyfob will not operatewhen the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The trunk lid will open when using the key-fob even if the trunk lid release cancelswitch is turned to OFF. See “Trunk lid”later in this section for cancel switch infor-mation.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 25 seconds, or

● any button is pushed on the keyfob.

WPD0319 LPD0211



Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and lamp flashfeature with the keyfob, the display screen(if so equipped) will not show the currentmode and cannot be used to change themode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-vious mode and re-enable the displayscreen control.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

Using the interior lights

Push the button on the keyfob once to turnon the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”in the “Instruments and controls”section earlier inthis manual.

Opening windows (if so equipped)The keyfob allows you to open the front windowssimultaneously.

● To open the front windows, press thebutton on the keyfob for longer than 3seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the keyfob.

LPD0262



s1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver side instrument panel; thehood springs up slightly.

s2 Lift the lever at the front of the hood with yourfingertips and raise the hood.

s3 Remove the support rod from the clamp.

s4 Insert the support rod into the slot on thepassenger side fender ledge.

5. When closing the hood, return the supportrod to its original position, lower the hood toapproximately 12 inches above the latch andrelease it. This allows proper engagement ofthe hood latch.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

WPD0288

HOOD



OPENER OPERATION

WARNING

● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.


To open the trunk lid, push the opener lever down.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk liddown securely.

NOTE:

You cannot open the trunk lid with thetrunk lid opener lever if the vehicle securitysystem (if so equipped) is armed.

Cancel switch (if so equipped)When the cancel switch located inside the glovebox is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened withthe trunk lid release switch. It can be opened withthe master key or keyfob.

LPD0287 LPD0085

TRUNK LID



KEY OPERATION (if so equipped)To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. Toclose the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk liddown securely.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they arearound cars to prevent them from playingand becoming locked in the trunk wherethey could be seriously injured. Keep thecar locked, with the rear seatback andtrunk lid securely latched when not in use,and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism providesa means of escape for children and adults in theevent they become locked inside the trunk.

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-nated release handle until the lock releases andpush up on the trunk lid. The release handle ismade of a material that glows in the dark after abrief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk compart-ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

WPD0138 LPD0289



OPENER OPERATIONThe fuel-filler door opener lever is located on theoutside of the driver’s seat s1 . To open thefuel-filler door, pull the opener lever up. To lock,close the fuel-filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn thecap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turnthe cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks areheard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder s1 whilerefueling.

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury. Then remove the cap.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator light to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

WPD0290 LPD0189

FUEL-FILLER DOOR



● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

● Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the mal-

function indicator light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionearlier in this manual.

TILT OPERATIONPull the lock lever s1 forward and adjust thesteering wheel up or down s2 to the desiredposition.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheelin place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

WPD0234

TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERINGCOLUMN



TELESCOPIC OPERATIONPush the lock lever s3 down and adjust thesteering wheel forward or backward s4 to thedesired position.

Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steeringwheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel anycloser to you than is necessary for propersteering operation and comfort. The driv-er’s air bag inflates with great force. If youare unrestrained, leaning forward, sittingsideways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the air bag if you are upagainst it when it inflates. Always sit backagainst the seatback and as far away aspractical from the steering wheel. Alwaysuse the seat belts.

Slide the sun visor extension (if so equipped) in orout as needed.

CAUTION

Do not store the sun visor before returningthe extension to its original position.

VANITY MIRRORSTo access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanitymirrors are illuminated and turn on when themirror cover is open.

WPD0140 WPD0141

SUN VISORS



REARVIEW MIRRORThe night position s1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position s2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

1. AUTO button2. OFF button3. AUTO indicator light4. Sensor (on back of mirror)5. Sensor

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally changes reflection according to the intensityof the headlights of the vehicle following you.

The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-matic anti-glare feature is on.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, pressthe OFF button.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, pressthe AUTO button.

Do not hang any object on the sensor orapply glass cleaner. Doing so will reducethe sensitivity of the sensor, resulting inimproper operation.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.You could lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

WPD0126 LPD0280

MIRRORS



Electric control type (if so equipped)The outside mirror remote control only operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Rotate the control lever to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position bymoving the control lever.

Manual control typeThe outside mirror can be moved in any directionfor a better rear view.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-tional information, see “Rear window and outsidemirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the“Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

WPD0274 LPD0296



4 Display screen, heater, air conditionerand audio systems

Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Names of the components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use joystick and “ENTER” button . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use “PREV” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use the “TRIP” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4How to use the “SETTING” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 4-15Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21

Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-23Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25FM-AM SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42


WARNING

● Positioning of the heating or air condi-tioning controls and display controlsshould not be done while driving in or-der that full attention may be given tothe driving operation.

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“ENTER” button — This is a button on the con-trol panel.

LHA0458

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if soequipped)

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems


“Display” key — This is a select key on thescreen. By selecting this key you can proceed tothe next function.

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS1. brightness control button (P. 4-10)

2. PREV (previous) button (P. 4-3)

3. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-3)

4. SETTING button (P. 4-6)

5. TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-4)

6. DEST button*

7. ROUTE button*

8. MAP button*

9. GUIDE VOICE button*

10. zoom out button*

11. zoom in button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND“ENTER” BUTTON

Choose an item on the display using the joystickand push the “ENTER” button for operation.

HOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTONThis button has two functions.

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you touch “PREV” button during setup, thesetup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

If you touch this button after the setup is com-pleted, the setup will start over, and the displaywill return to the climate control or audio modeand Navigation screen.

SETTING UP THE START-UPSCREENWhen you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, theSYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on thescreen. Read the warning and select the “IAGREE” (English) or “ENTER” (Français) keythen press the ENTER button.

If you do not press the ENTER button, the Navi-gation system will not proceed to the next stepdisplay.

If you do not touch a button or screen key formore than 1 minute on the START-UP screen, thescreen will change to the audio screen automati-cally.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3


HOW TO USE THE “TRIP” BUTTONWhen the “TRIP” button is pushed, the followingmodes will display on the screen.

Warning message (if there are any) → TRIP 1(Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, AverageSpeed) → TRIP 2 → FUEL ECONOMY (AverageFuel Economy, Distance to Empty) → MAINTE-NANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation and Tire Pres-sure — if so equipped) → OFF.

Trip 1, trip 2 and fuel economy itemsTo reset the TRIP 1, TRIP 2 and FUELECONOMY, select the “RESET” key using thejoystick and push the “ENTER” button or pushthe “TRIP” button for more than approximately1.5 seconds.

Maintenance itemsYou can set the engine oil and the tire rotationinterval.

To display the setting of the maintenance interval,select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” keyusing the joystick and push the “ENTER” button.

LHA0459 LHA0460 LHA0461



To set the maintenance interval, select the“Maintenance Schedule” key by using thejoystick and push the joystick to right or left.

To reset the maintenance interval, select the “Re-set” key using the joystick and push the “EN-TER” button.

To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATIONautomatically when set trip distance is reached,select the “Display Maintenance Notifica-tion” key and push the “ENTER” button.

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen (“EN-GINE OIL” and “TIRE ROTATION”) will be auto-matically displayed as shown when both of thefollowing conditions are met:

● the vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition key is turned OFF.

● the ignition key is turned ON the next timethe vehicle will be driving.

To return to the previous display after the “MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, pressthe PREV button.

LHA0462 LHA0463 LHA0483



The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen displayseach time the key is turned ON until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

● “RESET” is selected.

● “Display Maintenance and Notification” isset OFF.

● the maintenance interval is set again.

HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”BUTTON

To adjust the various settings within the displayscreen press the“SETTING” button.

After pressing the SETTING button a menu willbe shown on the display screen which will allowyou to program several functions such as thedisplay screen appearance, programmable fea-tures for your vehicles electronics system andother system settings such as your clock. Tomake a selection from this mode use the joystickand press the “ENTER” button.

Brightness/Contrast/Map Background:

To adjust the brightness and contrast of thescreen, select the “Brightness/contrast” keyand push the “ENTER” button. You can then usethe joystick to adjust the brightness to Darker orBrighter and the contrast to Lower or Higher. Forinformation on Map Background, please refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

Display Off:

To turn off the screen, push the “SETTING”button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-play Off” key. The indicator of the “DisplayOff” will turn to amber. When any mode button ispushed with the screen off, the screen turns onfor further operation. The screen will turn offautomatically 5 seconds after the operation isfinished on the map display in the Audio, HVAC(Heater and air conditioner), SETTING or VE-HICLE INFO modes.

To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING”button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-play Off” key, then set the screen to on bypushing the “ENTER” button.

LHA0268



Vehicle electronic systems

The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screenwill appear when selecting the “Vehicle Elec-tronic Systems” key with the joystick and push-ing the “ENTER” button.

To set the various electronic systems operatingconditions, select the applicable item using thejoystick, and push the “ENTER” button. Theindicator light, box at left of selected item, alter-nately turns on and off each time the “ENTER”button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

Remote unlock driver’s door first:

This option allows you to select which doors willunlock first during an unlocking operation:

Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors

Keyless remote response — horn:

This key allows you to change the horn chirpmode that occurs when pressing the LOCK orUNLOCK button on the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the displayscreen will not show the current mode. Usethe keyfob to return to the previous modeand re-enable the display screen control.

Keyless remote response — lights:

This key allows you to change the hazard indica-tor flash mode that occurs when pressing theLOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Auto re-lock time:

This key allows you to set the length of timebefore doors auto re-lock.

Sensitivity of automatic headlights:

This key allows you to set the sensitivity of theautomatic headlights:

● Lower- less sensitive, automatic headlightswill take longer to come on when the head-light sensor senses less ambient light.

LHA0464 WRS0443



● Higher- more sensitive, automatic head-lights will come on quicker when the head-light sensor senses less ambient light.

Automatic headlights off delay:

This key allows you to set the length of timebefore the automatic headlights turn off afterexiting the vehicle.

Speed dependent wiper:

This key allows you to turn on or turn off thedriving speed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion.

Return all settings to default:

When this key is selected and turned on usingthe “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE-HICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the defaultsettings.

System settingsLanguage/Unit

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear whenselecting the “Language/Unit” key and push-ing the “ENTER” button.

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGMetric — km, °C, L/100 km

You can select the language and unit using thejoystick and “ENTER” button.

Clock

Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and movethe joystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.

After completion of the setting, press the“PREV” button.

LHA0262 LHA0270



Setting daylight savings time:

Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjustthe clock to daylight savings time.

ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour.

OFF: The current time is displayed.

Adjusting the time to the GPS:

Select the “Auto Adjust” key.

The time will be reset to the GPS time.

Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.

The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear.

LHA0271 LHA0272 LHA0273



2. Select one of the following zones dependingon the current location.

● Pacific zone

● Mountain zone

● Central zone

● Eastern zone

● Atlantic zone

● Newfoundland zone

After selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS] screenwill appear.

The GPS time (manual time) corresponding tothe selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zonehas been set as the initial (default) setting.

Beep setting

With this option ON, a beep will sound if anyaudio button is pushed.

BUTTONTo change the display brightness, pushthe button. Pushing the button again willchange the display to DAY or NIGHT display.Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystickright or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the“PREV” button is pushed, the display will returnto the previous display.

LHA0274



Adjust air flow direction for the driver side s1 ,center s2 , and passenger side s3 ventilators bymoving the ventilator slide and/or ventilator as-semblies.

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

● Positioning of the heater and/or airconditioner controls should not bedone while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

LHA0439

VENTILATORS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual)



1. Fan control dial2. Air recirculation button3. Temperature control dial4. Air flow control dial5. Rear window defroster

Type AWHA0470



1. Fan control dial2. Air recirculation button3. Temperature control dial4. Air conditioner button (if so equipped)5. Air flow control dial6. Rear window defroster

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select theair flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling (airconditioning if so equipped).

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outletsand foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defrosteroutlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

NOTE:

The air recirculation feature is availableonly on those vehicles equipped with airconditioning.

ON position (Indicator light on):Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Push the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

Type BLHA0440



OFF position (Indicator light off):Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button (if soequipped)

The button is provided only on vehicles equippedwith an air conditioner.

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position and push the button toturn on the air conditioner. The indicator lightcomes on when the air conditioner is operating.To turn off the air conditioner, push thebutton again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switchFor more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window and outsidemirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATIONHeatingThis mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Push the button to the off position fornormal heating.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to theposition.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

VentilationThis mode directs outside air to the side andcenter ventilators.

1. Push the button to the off position.



4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.




● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to HI and thetemperature control lever to the full HOTposition.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light will not illuminate) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the vehicle is restarted,even if the air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.



Bi-level heating

This mode directs air from the side, center andthe foot outlets.





Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light will not illuminate) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-

tinue to operate until the vehicle is restarted,even if the air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (ifso equipped)

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.


2. Turn the air flow control dial to the MAX A/Cor position.


4. Push the button. The indicator lightcomes on.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe on position (indicator light on). Be sureto return the button to the off positionfor normal cooling. MAX A/C may be usedfor quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.








Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows anddehumidify the air.




When the , or positions in betweenare selected, the air conditioner automaticallyturns on (however, the indicator light will notilluminate) if the outside temperature is more than36°F (2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the vehicle is restarted, evenif the air flow control dial is turned to a positionother than the position. This dehumidifiesthe air which helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passenger com-partment to further improve the defogging perfor-mance.


Operating tips● Keep the windows and sunroof closed while

the air conditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. The air recirculationbutton should always be in the OFF posi-tion for heating and defrosting.



LHA0442 LHA0443



LHA0444 LHA0445



WHA0469



1. Fan control dial2. Air recirculation button3. Temperature dial

A. 60° F (18° C)B. 75° F (25° C)C. 90° F (32° C)

4. A/C ON/OFF button5. Air flow control dial6. Rear defrost button

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

● Positioning of the heater and/or airconditioner controls should not bedone while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating(auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round asthe system automatically works to keep a con-stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

1. Turn the fan control dial to the AUTO posi-tion.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature.

● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(25°C) for normal operation.

3. Turn the air flow control dial to AUTO.

LHA0480

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)



● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically.

● Air flow distribution and fan speed are alsocontrolled automatically.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate. When youneed to heat only, use this mode.

s1 Turn the fan control dial to the AUTO posi-tion.

s2 Push the A/C button to turn off the air con-ditioner. The light will not be illuminated inthe dial.

s3 Turn the temperature dial to the left or right toset the desired temperature.

● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution and fan speed are also con-trolled automatically.

● Do not set the temperature lower than theoutside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-tem may not work properly.

● Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defogging1. Turn the air flow control dial to the DEF

position to turn it on. The indicatorlight on the button will come on.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of thewindows, turn the manual fan control dial toHI.

● As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, turn the air flow control dial to theAUTO position to return to the auto mode.

● When the control dial is turned to theDEF position, the air conditioner willautomatically be turned on at outside tem-peratures above 36°F (2°C). The air condi-tioning system will continue to operate untilthe vehicle is restarted, even if the air flowcontrol dial is turned to a position other thanthe position. This dehumidifies the airwhich helps defog the windshield. The airrecirculate mode automatically turns off, al-lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-senger compartment to further improve thedefogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATIONFan speed control

Turn the fan control dial left or right tomanually control the fan speed.

Turn the control dial to the AUTO position toreturn to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicatorlight on the switch will come on.

The air recirculation button will not be activatedwhen the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

Air flow control

Turning the air flow control dial away from AUTOselects the air outlet to:

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.



To turn system offTurn the fan control dial to the OFF position.

OPERATING TIPS● When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, air flow from the foot outletswill operate normally.

The sunload sensor, located on the top driver’sside of the instrument panel, helps the systemmaintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-thing on or around this sensor.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” section of thismanual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

LHA0457

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER



RADIO

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knobto turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio withthe engine not running, the key should be turnedto the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area, and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30miles (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single chan-nel) FM having slightly more range than stereoFM. External influences may sometimes interferewith FM station reception even if the FM station iswithin 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distance betweenthe transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow aline-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the samecharacteristics as light. For example, they willreflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter) static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed or thebattery has been replaced, the satellite radio maynot work properly. This is not a malfunction. Waitmore than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and

AUDIO SYSTEM



the vehicle outside of any metal or large buildingfor satellite radio to receive all of the necessarydata.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isselected unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONSCompact disc (CD) player

● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot functionwhen the compartment temperature is ex-tremely high or low. Decrease/increasethe temperature before use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work properly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

LHA0099



1. PRESET ABC button2. MIX button3. Display4. CD select button5. FM band select button6. AM band select button7. CD eject button8. PAUSE/MUTE button9. TUNE/FF-REV button10. CLOCK button11. Preset scan (P-SCAN) button12. AUDIO button13. SCAN button14. Station preset buttons15. CD insert slot16. PWR/VOL control knob17. SEEK/TRACK button

FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

PWR/VOL control knob

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,then press the PWR/VOL control knob. If youlisten to the radio with the engine not running,turn the key to the ACC position. The mode (radioor CD) that was playing immediately before thesystem was turned off resumes playing.

LHA0447



When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.Pressing the PWR/VOL control knob again turnsthe system off.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right toincrease volume or to the left to decrease volume.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance

Press the AUDIO button to enter the audio adjustmode:

Bass→Mid→Treb→Fade→Bal

Press the TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) orSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjust to thedesired levels. The display will return to the regu-lar radio display after 10 seconds, or you maypress the AUDIO button again to return to theregular radio display.

Clock operation

Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clockwith the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK buttonagain to turn off the clock display.

Clock set

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button until itbeeps (longer than 2 seconds).

2. The hours will start flashing. PressTUNE/FF-REV ( or ) orSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjustthe hours.

3. Press the CLOCK button to switch to theminute adjustment.

4. Press TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) orSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjustthe minutes.

5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCKbutton again to return to the regular clock display.

FM-AM radio operation

FM-AM band select

Push the AM or the FM button to change from AMto FM reception.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FF—REV

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned while driv-ing so full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

Use the and buttons for manualtuning. To move quickly through the channels,hold the tuning buttons down.

SEEK tuning

Push SEEK/TRACK ( or ). SEEKtuning begins from low to high frequencies orhigh to low frequencies, depending on whichbutton is pressed, and stops at the next broad-casting station. If using the up button, once thehighest broadcasting station is reached, the ra-dio continues in the SEEK mode at the lowestbroadcasting station. If using the down button,once the lowest broadcasting station is reached,the radio continues in the SEEK mode at thehighest broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in thedisplay window. SCAN tuning begins from low tohigh frequencies. SCAN tuning stops for 5 sec-onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-cient signal strength. When scanning, SCANblinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN buttonagain during this 5 second period stops SCANtuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operation

Each preset mode (A, B or C) has 6 presets,capable of storing any combination of AM, FM,SAT (if so equipped ) and FM RDS stations.



Press the PRESET ABC button to change be-tween the presets:

A→B→C

The radio displays icon A, B or C to indicatewhich set of presets is active.

To store a radio station in a preset:

1. Select the desired preset by pressing PRE-SET ABC.

2. Select the desired AM, FM or SAT (if soequipped) station band.

3. Tune to the desired station.

4. Press the desired station select button(>1.5 seconds).

5. A beep will sound indicating memorization iscomplete.

6. Other station select buttons can be set inthe same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radiofuse opens, the radio memory is canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Preset Scan

Pressing the Preset Scan button (<1.5 seconds)scans the permanent preset memory that is se-lected (A, B or C) from 1 - 6 for 5 seconds.

All Preset Scan

Pressing the Preset Scan button (>1.5 seconds)scans all the permanent preset memory banks (A,B and C) from 1 - 6 for 5 seconds.

Canceling Preset Scan mode

Pressing the Preset Scan (P.SCAN) button againwill cancel the Preset Scan mode.

Speed Sensitive Control Volume (SSV) (ifso equipped)

Your vehicle has Speed Sensitive Control Vol-ume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changesas the driving speed changes.

Press the AUDIO button until the display shows“SSV”. Press TUNE/FF-REV ( or )to change between:

Off→Low→Mid→High

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the last used compact disc starts to play.

FF (Fast Forward), REW(Rewind) buttons

When the TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) but-ton is pressed while the compact disc is playing,the compact disc plays at an increased speedwhile fast forwarding or rewinding. When thebutton is released, the compact disc returns tonormal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

When is pressed while the compact discis playing, the next track following the presentone starts to play from the beginning.Press several times to skip several tracks.Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-pears in the display window. (When the last trackon the compact disc is skipped, the first track isplayed.)



When is pressed, the track being playedreturns to the beginning. Press severaltimes to skip back several tracks. Each time thebutton is pressed the CD moves back 1 track. Ifthe play pattern is in MIX mode when the button ispressed, the next random selection will beplayed.

MIX button

Press the MIX button to change CD play pat-terns:

Repeat→Mix→Normal Play

Repeat

Press the MIX button (<1.5 seconds) once torepeat the current track. The “1” icon is turned on.

Mix

Press the MIX button (<1.5 seconds) again tostart shuffle play of the current disc. The “MIX”icon is turned on.

Normal play

Press the MIX button (<1.5 seconds) again toreturn to normal play mode. The “MIX” icon isturned off.

SCAN (CDs) button:

Press the SCAN button less than 1.5 seconds toscan all tracks of the current disc for 10 secondsper track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scanmode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans throughall tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button ispressed during scan mode.

Eject CD

1. Press the button.

2. The disc ejects. Remove the disc. (If the discis not removed within 15 seconds, the discwill reload.)

3. The indicator and symbol for the disc areturned off.



1. PRESET ABC button2. LOAD button3. Display4. CD select button5. FM/AM band select button6. SAT (satellite) radio select button*7. CD eject button8. PAUSE/MUTE button9. TUNE FF-REV button10. MENU/CLOCK button11. CAT/RPT button12. AUDIO button13. SCAN button14. Station preset buttons15. CD insert slot16. POWER/VOL control knob17. SEEK/TRACK button

*No satellite radio reception is availableand “NO SAT” is displayed when theSAT button is pressed unless optionalsatellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XMT or SIRIUS™ satelliteradio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio is not available in Alaska,Hawaii and Guam.

LHA0448



FM-AM SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (ifso equipped)

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

PWR/VOL control knob

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,then push the PWR/VOL control knob. If youlisten to the radio with the engine not running,turn the key to the ACC position. The mode[radio, CD or SAT (if so equipped)] that wasplaying immediately before the system wasturned off resumes playing.

Pushing the PWR/VOL control knob again turnsthe system off.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right toincrease volume or to the left to decrease volume.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance

Press the AUDIO button to enter the audio adjustmode:

Bass→Treb→Fade→Bal

Press the TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) orSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjust to thedesired levels. The display will return to the regu-lar radio display after 10 seconds, or you maypress the AUDIO button again to return to theregular radio display.

Clock operation

Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clockwith the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK buttonagain to turn off the clock display.

Clock set

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button until itbeeps (>1.5 seconds).

2. The hours will start flashing. PressTUNE/FF-REV ( or ) orSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjustthe hours.

3. Press the CLOCK button to switch to theminute adjustment.

4. Press TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) orSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjustthe minutes.

5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 7 seconds, or you may press the CLOCKbutton again to return to the regular clock display.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pushing the FM, AM or SAT radio select buttonwill change the band to either FM, AM or SAT(satellite-if so equipped) radio stations.

When the FM, AM or SAT radio select button ispushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC orON, the radio will come on at the station lastplayed.

The last station played will also come on whenthe Power/Volume control knob is depressed toON.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

If a compact disc is playing when the FM, AM orSAT radio select button is pushed, the compactdisc will automatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will come on.



The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FF—REV

WARNING


Use the and buttons for manualtuning. To move quickly through the channels,hold the tuning buttons down.

SEEK tuning

Push SEEK/TRACK ( or ). SEEKtuning begins from low to high frequencies orhigh to low frequencies, depending on whichbutton is pressed, and stops at the next broad-casting station. If using the up button, once thehighest broadcasting station is reached, the ra-dio continues in the SEEK mode at the lowestbroadcasting station. If using the down button,once the lowest broadcasting station is reached,the radio continues in the SEEK mode at thehighest broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Push the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in thedisplay window. SCAN tuning begins from low tohigh frequencies. SCAN tuning stops for 5 sec-onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-cient signal strength. When scanning, SCANblinks in the display. Pushing the SCAN buttonagain during this 5 second period stops SCANtuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operation

Each preset mode (A, B or C) has 6 presets,capable of storing any combination of AM, FM,SAT (if so equipped ) and FM RDS stations.

Press the PRESET ABC button to change be-tween the presets:

A→B→C

The radio displays icon A, B or C to indicatewhich set of presets is active.

To store a radio station in a preset:

1. Select the desired preset by pressing PRE-SET ABC.

2. Select the desired AM, FM or SAT (if soequipped) station band.

3. Tune to the desired station.

4. Press the desired station select button(>1.5 seconds).

5. A beep will sound indicating memorization iscomplete.

6. Other station select buttons can be set inthe same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radiofuse opens, the radio memory is canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band) and/orSAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad-cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in largecities, but many stations are now consideringbroadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.



Program type (PTY):

PTY can be used to search for a certain programtype. Certain areas have a limited number ofstations that transmit RDS. Many stations trans-mit call letters and frequencies only.

Searching or scanning by program type may yielda limited number of selections.

When CAT/RPT button is pressed for more than1.5 seconds during FM or SAT (if so equipped)mode, the PTY name of the current tuned stationis displayed. During this time if the PTY data codeis zero or the data is unreadable, the display willshow NONE.

To change the PTY:

1. Press the CAT/RPT button.

2. Press the TUNE/FF-REV ( or )up/down button to chose a specific programtype.

ROCK, CLASSIC ROCK, SOFT ROCK,TOP 40, COUNTRY, JAZZ, CLASSICAL,OLDIES, NEWS, SPORTS, TALK, ANY

SEEK tuning:

3. After selecting a program type, push theSEEK/TRACK button ( or ) forless than 1.5 seconds within 10 seconds.Tuning to the PTY station will start. If you donot push the SEEK button within the 10second period, the PTY mode will be can-celed.

SCAN tuning:

4. Push the SCAN button for more than 1.5seconds to scan the PTY name stations andstop at each broadcasting station for 5 sec-onds. Pushing the button again during this 5second period will stop SCAN tuning andthe radio will remain tuned to that station. Ifthe SCAN button is not pushed within 5seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the nextstation.

Speed Sensitive Control Volume (SSV) (ifso equipped)

Your vehicle has Speed Sensitive Control Vol-ume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changesas the driving speed changes.

Press and hold the AUDIO button until the radiobeeps to start the editing mode. Press the AU-DIO button until the display shows “SSV OFF”.Press TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) tochange between:

Off→Low→Mid→HighCompact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION



CD6 button

When the CD6 button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the last used compact disc starts to play.

CD loading

Press the LOAD button to start CD loadingmode.

The following sequence will occur:

1. If other discs are already loaded, the discnumber indicator on the lowest availabledisc select button will start blinking. Thedisplay shows “Select Disc” .

2. The display changes to “Insert Disc” for amaximum of 15 seconds.



3. During the 15 second interval, insert thedisc. The display changes to “LoadingDisc” .

4. The CD will play after the disc is set to a playposition.

5. The indicator changes from blinking discnumber indicator to solid disc numberindicator and the display changes to showthe Disc number icon, Disc number, Tracknumber and Elapsed time.

All disc loading

1. Press and hold the LOAD button until theradio beeps (>1.5 seconds).

2. The numbered disc indicator on the lowestavailable disc select button will start blink-ing. The display shows “All Loading”.

3. The display changes to “Insert Disc” for amaximum of 15 seconds.

4. During the 15 second interval, insert thedisc. The display changes to “LoadingDisc”.

5. The indicator changes from blinking num-bered disc to solid numbered disc.

6. The disc number icon is turned on.

7. Repeat steps 2–5 until all discs are loaded,then the last loaded disc will begin to play.The display shows the Disc number, Tracknumber and Elapsed Time.

Selected disc loading

1. Press an available disc select button whoseindicator is off. The display shows “PleaseWait”.

2. The numbered disc indicator starts blink-ing and the display shows “Insert Disc” for15 seconds.

3. Insert the CD. The display shows “LoadingDisc”.

4. The CD will play after the disc is set to a playposition.

5. The indicator changes from blinking num-bered disc to solid numbered disc andthe display shows the Disc icon, Disc num-ber, Track number and Elapsed Time.

If a disc is not inserted within 15 seconds or if theload button is pressed during load sequence, theentire disc load sequence will be canceled.

Disc play

Press the CD6 button. If a CD is loaded and theradio is playing, the radio turns off and the lastloaded disc starts to play.

Selected disc play

1. Press the disc select button whose disc iconis displayed.

2. The indicator blinks during the change.

3. The CD plays after the disc is set to a playposition.

4. The indicator changes from blinking num-bered disc to solid numbered disc andthe display shows the Disc number, Tracknumber and Elapsed Time.

CAT/RPT :

When the CAT/RPT button is pushed while thecompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT → 1 TRACK RPT→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISCRPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRACK RPT: The current track will be repeatedALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly.1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly.



FF (fast forward) REW(rewind) buttons

When the TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) but-ton is pressed while the compact disc is playing,the compact disc plays at an increased speedwhile fast forwarding or rewinding. When thebutton is released, the CD returns to normal playspeed.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

When is pressed while the compact discis playing, the track following the present onestarts to play from the beginning. Pressseveral times to skip several tracks. Each time thebutton is pressed, the CD advances 1 additionaltrack. The track number appears in the displaywindow. (When the last track on the compactdisc is skipped, the first track is played.)

When is pressed, the track being playedreturns to the beginning. Press severaltimes to skip back several tracks. Each time thebutton is pressed, the CD moves back 1 track. Ifthe play pattern is in CAT/RPT mode when thebutton is pressed the next random selection willbe played.

CD scan

1 Disc All Tracks

Press the SCAN button (<1.5 seconds) to scanall tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds pertrack. The display shows the track number andelapsed time as normal. The disc track number isflashed during Scan mode.

The Scan mode is canceled once it scansthrough all tracks on the disc, or if the SCANbutton is pressed during Scan mode.

All Discs, 1 Track

Press and hold the SCAN button (>1.5 seconds)to scan the first track of all the loaded discs for 10seconds per track. The display shows the tracknumber and elapsed time as normal. The disctrack number is flashed during Scan mode.

The Scan mode is canceled once it scansthrough all the loaded discs, or if the SCANbutton is pressed during Scan mode.

Eject CD

Current disc

1. Press the button.

2. The numbered disc indicator starts to blinkand the display shows “Select Disc” for 2seconds. The display then changes to “DiscEject” .

3. The disc ejects. Remove the disc. (If the discis not removed within 15 seconds, the discwill reload.)


Select a disc

1. Press the desired disc, then pressthe button.

2. The numbered disc indicator starts blinkingand the display shows “Select Disc” for 2seconds. The display then changes to “DiscEject” .

3. The disc ejects. Remove the disc (If the discis not removed within 15 seconds, the discwill reload.)


All discs

1. Press and hold the button until theradio beeps (>1.5 seconds).

2. The display then shows “All Disc Eject” .

3. When a disc is removed, the indicator anddisc icon will be turned off, and then the nextdisc will emerge, and so on.



4. The display will be turned off after all discsare ejected and removed.

If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds, or ifthe button is pressed again during theEject sequence, the entire disc Eject sequencewill be canceled.

1. SEEK/TRACK change button2. TUNE/REW/FF button3. PAUSE/MUTE button4. CAT/RPT button5. PRESET A-B-C select button6. CD play button

7. FM band select button8. AM band select button9. SAT (satellite) radio select button*10. SCAN button11. LOAD button12. CD insert slot

LHA0468



13. CD eject button14. POWER/VOLUME control knob15. Station and CD select buttons (1 - 6)16. Tuning and AUDIO control knob

(BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE, BAL-ANCE and SSV)

*No satellite radio reception is availableand “NO SAT” is displayed when theSAT button is pressed unless optionalsatellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XMT or SIRIUS™ satelliteradio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio is not available in Alaska,Hawaii and Guam.

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (ifso equipped)

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed to select satellite radio stations unlessoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XMT or SIRIUS™ satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpush the POWER/VOLUME control knob whilethe system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)which was playing immediately before the systemwas turned off.

To turn the system off, press thePOWER/VOLUME control knob.

Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad-just the volume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-ing speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE,FADE, BALANCE and SSV):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode asfollows:

BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE→ SSV

To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade andBalance, press the AUDIO knob until the desiredmode appears in the display. Turn the Tuningknob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desiredlevel. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjustFader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear speakersand Balance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID orHIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

Clock set

For setting the clock see “Adjusting the time”earlier in this section.

Display CD text:

To change the text displayed while playing a CD,press the AUDIO knob until “Display Mode” ap-pears.

Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The textwill change as follows:

Track number ←→ Track title ←→ Disc title ←→Track number

Display satellite radio text (if so equipped):

To change the text displayed while listening tosatellite radio, press the AUDIO knob until “Dis-play Mode” appears.



Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The textwill change as follows:

Channel number ←→ Channel name ←→ Artist←→ Title ←→ Channel number

Pause/mute button:

To mute or pause the audio sound, push thePAUSE/MUTE button. Radio mute will flash in thedisplay screen.

To release the mute or pause, push the buttonagain.

FM/AM/SAT radio operationFM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the FM, AM or SAT radio select buttonwill change the band to either FM, AM or SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio stations.

When the FM, AM or SAT radio select button ispressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC orON, the radio will come on at the station lastplayed.

The last station played will also come on whenthe POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressedon.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™

satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

If a compact disc is playing when the FM, AM orSAT radio select button is pushed, the compactdisc will automatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

WARNING


To manually tune the radio, push the TUNE button( or ) or turn the tuning knob to rightor left.

To move quickly through the channels, hold eitherthe or button down for more than1.5 seconds.

SEEK tuning:

Push the SEEK/TRACK button ( or )for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to lowor low to high frequencies and stop at the nextbroadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Push the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in thedisplay window. SCAN tuning begins from low tohigh frequencies. SCAN tuning stops for 5 sec-onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-cient signal strength. When scanning, SCANblinks in the display. Pushing the SCAN buttonagain during this 5 second period stops SCANtuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(Satellite-if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using thepreset select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station band.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any ofthe desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)until a beep sound is heard.



4. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Memorizing is nowcomplete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseblows, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band) and/orSAT radio encoded within a regular SAT broad-cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in largecities, but many stations are now consideringbroadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country” or “Rock”.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Program type (PTY):

PTY can be used to search for a certain programtype. Certain areas have a limited number ofstations that transmit RDS. Many stations trans-mit call letters and frequencies only.

Searching or scanning by program type may yielda limited number of selections.

When CAT/RPT button is pressed for more than1.5 seconds during FM or SAT (if so equipped)mode, the PTY name of the current tuned stationis displayed. During this time if the PTY data codeis zero or the data is unreadable, the display willshow NONE.

To change the PTY:

1. Press the CAT/RPT button.

2. Press the TUNE/FF-REV ( or )up/down button to chose a specific programtype.

ROCK, CLASSIC ROCK, SOFT ROCK,TOP 40, COUNTRY, JAZZ, CLASSICAL,OLDIES, NEWS, SPORTS, TALK, ANY

SEEK tuning:

3. After selecting a program type, push theSEEK/TRACK button ( or ) forless than 1.5 seconds within 10 seconds.Tuning to the PTY station will start. If you donot push the SEEK button within the 10second period, the PTY mode will be can-celed.

SCAN tuning:

4. Push the SCAN button for more than 1.5seconds to scan the PTY name stations andstop at each broadcasting station for 5 sec-onds. Pushing the button again during this 5second period will stop SCAN tuning andthe radio will remain tuned to that station. Ifthe SCAN button is not pushed within 5seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the nextstation.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

CAUTION





Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc will beguided automatically into the slot and start play-ing. To insert the disc, first press the LOADbutton.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing thePOWER/VOLUME control knob will start thecompact disc.

LOAD button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press theLOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Selectthe loading slot by pressing the CD insert selectbutton (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press theLOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radiowill automatically be turned off and the compactdisc will start to play.

REW (Rewind), FF (FastForward):

When the (rewind) or (fast forward)button is pushed while a compact disc is playing,the compact disc will play while rewinding or fastforwarding . When the button is released, thecompact disc will return to normal play speed.

When the CD button is pushed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the compactdisc loaded with the tape or the radio playing, thetape or radio will automatically be turned off andthe compact disc will start to play.

SEEK/TRACK:

When the button is pushed for less than 1.5seconds while a compact disc is playing, thetrack being played returns to its beginning. Pushseveral times to skip back through tracks. Thecompact disc will go back the number of timesthe button is pushed.

When the button is pushed for less than 1.5seconds while the compact disc is playing, the

next track will start to play from its beginning.Push several times to skip through tracks. Thecompact disc will advance the number of timesthe button is pushed. (When the last track on thecompact disc is skipped through, the first trackwill be played.)

When pushing the or button for morethan 1.5 seconds, each track will play for about10 seconds. To stop playing, pushthe button again.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).

CAT/RPT:

When the CAT/RPT play button is pushed whilethe compact disc is played, the play pattern canbe changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISCRPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingwill be repeatedALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly



1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly

CD EJECT:

Current disc:

● Press the slot number (1 – 6) for the desireddisc, then press the button. The com-pact disc will be ejected. If the disc is notremoved within 15 seconds, the disc willreload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 15 seconds, or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pressed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc will ejectand the last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.

CD CARE AND CLEANING● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.● Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center

to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Donot wipe the disc using a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

1. Volume control switch2. Mode select switch3. Audio power on/off switch4. Audio tuning Up/DownSTEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

LHA0049Type A

WHA0471



1. Volume control switch2. Mode select switch3. Trip4. Audio tuning Up/Down

POWER on/off switch (Type A)

With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ONposition, push the POWER switch to turn theaudio system on or off.

Trip set (Type B)For information on using the trip computer see“Trip computer” in the “Instrument and controls”section of this owner’s manual.

“MODE” select switch

Push the mode select switch to change themodes:

PRESET A → PRESET B → PRESET C → CD

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,B or C), push the tuning switch orfor less than 1.5 seconds to change to the nextpreset station in memory.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previousradio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

This system searches for the blank intervals be-tween selections. If there is a blank interval within1 program or there is no interval between pro-grams, the system may not stop in the desired orexpected location.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the SEEK tuning switch or formore than 1.5 seconds to change the playingdisc up or down.

ANTENNA

Window antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rearwindow.

CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near therear window glass or attach any metalparts to it. This may cause poor recep-tion or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window antenna.Lightly wipe along the antenna with adampened soft cloth.

Type BLHA0450



When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions, otherwise the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO



5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Automatic transmission (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Anti-lock braking system (ABS)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Traction control system (TCS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-21Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24


WARNING



EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,otherwise exhaust gases could bedrawn into the passenger compart-ment. If you must drive with the trunk lidopen, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the trunk lid or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving


CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As withany vehicle, loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects, orcause the vehicle to roll over, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, andavoid driving when tired. Never drive when underthe influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs which maycause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt asoutlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisionsand rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedor improperly belted person is significantlymore likely to be injured or killed than aperson properly wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

Starting and driving 5-3


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONThe ignition lock is designed so the key cannot beturned to the LOCK position and removed untilthe shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park)position.

When removing the key from the ignition, makesure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)position.

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCKposition.

To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-tion with the key in the ON position.

2. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

3. Remove the key from the ignition.

If the selector lever is shifted to the P (Park)position after the key is turned to the OFF posi-tion or when the key cannot be turned to theLOCK position, proceed as follows to remove thekey.

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ONposition.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannotmoved out of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFFposition or if the key is removed from the switch.

The shift selector lever can be moved if theignition switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ACC positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.When the ignition is in the OFF position,the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-tion, turn the steering wheel to the left orright while turning the key to unlock thekey cylinder.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

WSD0057

IGNITION SWITCH



MANUAL TRANSMISSION

The ignition switch includes a device that helpsprevent accidental removal of the key while driv-ing.

The key can only be removed when the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK position.

On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-tion key to LOCK position from ACC or ONposition, turn the key to OFF, push the key in, thenturn the key to LOCK.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

KEY POSITIONSLOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Manual transmission model) (1)

The engine can be turned off without locking thesteering wheel.

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

WSD0058



● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake and clutch fluid, and windowwasher fluid as frequently as possible, or atleast whenever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe key is turned to the ON (3) position. See“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park) and into any ofthe other gear positions if the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position or ifthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector lever is in any of thedriving positions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depressthe clutch pedal to the floor while crankingthe engine.

The starter is designed not to operateunless the clutch pedal is fully de-pressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionkey to START. Release the key when theengine starts. If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. Aftercranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition key to START. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE



4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manualshift mode. Always depress the brakepedal until shifting is completed. Fail-ure to do so could cause you to losecontrol and have an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

CAUTION

● When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrake should be used for this purpose.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to produce maximumpower and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE



Gate type shift

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to produce maximumpower and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before attempting to movethe shift selector lever out of the P (Park)position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed sothe foot brake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to any driveposition while the ignition switch is in theON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be movedout of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turnedto the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if thekey is removed. Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector lever out of theP (Park) position.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

LSD0023 LSD0022



If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position forany reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), orany D (Drive) position, the shift selector levercannot be moved to P (Park). Additionally, the keycannot be turned to the LOCK position and beremoved from the ignition switch. If this occurs,perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle isstopped.

2. Turn the key to the ON position.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal.

4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre-ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P(Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni-tion key to the LOCK position to remove thekey.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine. Make surethe vehicle is completely stopped. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the se-lector lever from the N (Neutral) or anydrive position to P (Park). Apply the parkingbrake. When parking on a hill, apply the parkingbrake first, then shift the selector lever into the P(Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure thevehicle is completely stopped before selectingthe R (Reverse) position. The brake pedalmust be depressed to move the selectorlever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any driveposition to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

3 (Third gear):

Use this position for driving up and down longslopes where engine braking would be advanta-geous.

2 (Second gear):

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-ing on downhill grades.

Do not shift into the 2 position at speeds above62 MPH (100 km/h). Do not exceed 62 MPH(100 km/h) in the 2 position.

1 (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,or for maximum engine braking on steep downhillgrades.

Do not shift into the 1 position at speeds above34 MPH (55 km/h). Do not exceed 34 MPH (55km/h) in the 1 position.



Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is shifted from D to themanual shift gate with the vehicle stopped orwhile driving, the transmission enters the manualshift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-ally.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-played on the position indicator in the meter.When shifting the shift lever to the manual shiftgate, the position indicator displays 1 (first) up to5 (fifth) depending on vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5

5 (Fifth):

Use this position for all normal forward driving athighway speeds.

4 (Fourth):

For driving up or down long slopes where enginebraking would be advantageous.

3 (Third) and 2 (Second):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhillgrades.

M1 (First):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor driving slowly through deep snow, sand ormud, or for maximum engine braking on steepdownhill grades.

● Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time in lower than 4range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up:

Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shiftsto higher range.)

When shifting down:

Move the selector lever to the 2 (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)

● The transmission will automatically down-shift the gears. (For example, if you select the3rd range, the transmission will shift downbetween the 3rd and 1st gears.)

● Moving the selector lever rapidly to the sameside twice will shift the ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Return the selector lever to the D position toreturn the transmission to the normal drivingmode.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may not shift to the selected gear.This helps maintain driving perfor-mance and reduces the chance of ve-hicle damage or loss of control.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may shift up automatically to ahigher range than selected if the en-gine speed is too high. When the ve-hicle speed decreases, the transmis-sion automatically shifts down andshifts to 1st gear before the vehiclecomes to a stop.

LSD0126



Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector levermay not be moved from the P (Park) position evenwith the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shiftlock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will belocked unless the ignition switch is turned to theON position. This allows the vehicle to be movedif the battery is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key


3. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu-tral) position while holding down the shiftlock release.

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock thesteering wheel. Now the vehicle may bemoved to the desired location.

If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out ofP (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-matic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

Type ALSD0024

Type BLSD0127



Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, please notethat the transmission will be locked in any of theforward gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. This will occureven if all electrical circuits are functioningproperly. In this case, turn the ignition keyOFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn thekey back to the ON position. The vehicleshould return to its normal operating con-dition. If it does not return to its normaloperating condition, have a NISSAN dealercheck the transmission and repair it if nec-essary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

WARNING

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-ing to a lower gear. This may cause aloss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION

● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving. This may cause clutchdamage.

● Fully depress the clutch pedal beforeshifting to help prevent transmissiondamage.

● Stop your vehicle completely beforeshifting into R (Reverse).

● When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running (for example, at a stoplight), shift to N (Neutral) and releasethe clutch pedal with the foot brakeapplied.

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift intothe appropriate gear, then release the clutchslowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depressthe clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. Ifthe clutch pedal is not fully depressed before thetransmission is shifted, a gear noise may beheard. Transmission damage could occur.

On the 5-speed manual transmission, you cannotshift directly from 5th gear into R (Reverse). Firstshift into N (Neutral), then into R (Reverse).

5 - speedLSD0128



On the 6–speed manual transmission to back up,lift up on the collar just below the shift lever andthen move it to the R (Reverse) position afterstopping the vehicle completely.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), thenrelease the clutch pedal. Depress the clutchpedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested upshift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds forshifting into a higher gear. These suggestionsrelate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.Actual upshift speeds will vary according to roadconditions, the weather and individual drivinghabits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (lessthan 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

For QR25DE:

GEAR CHANGE ACCEL shiftpoint MPH

(km/h)

CRUISE shiftpoint MPH

(km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24) 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40) 18 (29)

3rd to 4th 36 (58) 30 (48)

4th to 5th 40 (64) 39 (62)

For VQ35DE:


(km/h)


(km/h)

1st to 2nd 13 (21) 13 (21)

2nd to 3rd 23 (37) 16 (26)

3rd to 4th 33 (53) 27 (44)

4th to 5th 39 (63) 36 (58)

For VQ35DE SE-R:


(km/h)


(km/h)

1st to 2nd 13 (21) 13 (21)

2nd to 3rd 23 (37) 16 (26)

3rd to 4th 33 (53) 27 (44)

4th to 5th 39 (63) 36 (58)

5th to 6th

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas andhigh altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th*

*6 Speed available on SE-R models only.

Suggested maximum speed in eachgear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is notrunning smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,

6 - speedLSD0133



use the highest gear suggested for that speed.Always observe posted speed limits, and driveaccording to the road conditions, which will en-sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the enginewhen shifting to a lower gear as it may causeengine damage or loss of vehicle control.

GEAR QR25DEMPH (km/h)

VQ35DEMPH (km/h)

1st 32 (52) 41 (66)

2nd 57 (92) 70 (113)

3rd 89 (143) — (—)

4th — —

5th — —

For VQ35DE SE-R:

GEAR VQ35DEMPH (km/h)

1st 37 (60)

2nd 61 (98)

3rd 85 (137)

4th —

5th —

6th —

WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Pull the lever up sA .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-tion.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake leverslightly, push the button and lower com-pletely sB .

LSD0131

PARKING BRAKE



4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. ON/OFF switch4. CANCEL switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control main switch off and have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control main switch is turned ONwhile pushing the ACCEL/RES,COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (locatedon the steering wheel). To properly set thecruise control system, use the following pro-cedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

LSD0075

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)



CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do notshift into N (Neutral) without depressingthe clutch pedal when the cruise control isset. Should this occur, depress the clutchpedal and turn the main switch off imme-diately. Failure to do so may cause enginedamage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the mainswitch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISEindicator light and SET indicator light in theinstrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake or clutch pedal whilepushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COASTswitch. The preset speed is deleted frommemory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-mission), or move the shift selector lever to N(Neutral) (automatic transmission).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).



CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-proper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-tion” in “Technical and consumer informa-tion” later in this manual.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY



WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park) forautomatic transmission models or in anappropriate gear for manual transmis-sion models. Failure to do so couldcause the vehicle to move unexpectedlyor roll away and result in an accident.Make sure the shift lever has beenpushed as far forward as it can go andcannot be moved without depressingthe foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-tion. When parking on an uphill grade, placethe shift lever in 1st gear.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: sA

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: sB

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS



● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: sC

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will beharder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM



WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

Wet brakesWhen the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS) (if so equipped)

The anti-lock braking system controls the brakesso the wheels do not lock when braking abruptlyor when braking on slippery surfaces. The systemdetects the rotation speed at each wheel andvaries the brake fluid pressure to prevent eachwheel from locking and sliding. By preventingwheel lockup, the system helps the driver main-tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv-ing and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Normal operation

The anti-lock braking system does not operate atspeeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (Thespeeds vary according to road conditions.)

When driving, the anti-lock braking system con-trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak-ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road.Thus, steering control is increased and swervingof the vehicle is decreased during emergencybraking. The system detects the wheel rotationrate and electronically controls the pressure ap-plied to each brake. Slight vibration on the brakepedal accompanied by noise usually occurs whilethe ABS system is operating. Such vibration andnoise encountered during abrupt braking is not aproblem, but indicates that the system is func-tioning properly. However, the pulsation may in-dicate that road conditions are hazardous andextra care is required while driving.

Self-test featureThe anti-lock braking system consists of elec-tronic sensors and hydraulic solenoids controlledby a computer. The computer has a built-in diag-nostic feature that tests the system each time youstart the engine and move the vehicle at a lowspeed in forward or reverse. When the self-testoccurs, you may hear a “clunk”noise and/or feel apulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and isnot an indication of any malfunction. If the com-puter senses any malfunction, it switches theanti-lock braking system off and turns on the ABSbrake warning light on the instrument panel. Thebraking system then operates normally, but with-out anti-lock assistance.



If the light comes on during the self-test or whiledriving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer forrepair.

WARNING

● The anti-lock braking system is a so-phisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces, but re-member that the stopping distance onslippery surfaces will be longer than onnormal surfaces even with the anti-lockbraking system. Stopping distancesmay also be longer on rough, gravel orsnow covered roads, or if you are usingtire chains. Tire type and condition mayalso affect braking effectiveness. Al-ways maintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front of you. Ultimately, theresponsibility for safety of self and oth-ers rests in the hands of the driver.

● Tire type and condition of tires may alsoaffect braking effectiveness.

● When replacing tires, install the speci-fied size of tires on all four wheels.

● When installing a spare tire, make sureit is the proper size and type as speci-fied on the tire placard. For tire placardlocation information, refer to “Tire plac-ard” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

● Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion of this manual.

When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tiremay spin or slip. With the vehicle traction controlsystem (TCS), sensors detect these movementsand control the braking and engine output to helpimprove vehicle stability while accelerating.

● When the traction control system is operat-ing, the slip indicator in the instrument panelblinks.

● If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is un-der slippery conditions. Be sure to drivecarefully. See “Slip indicator light”and “Trac-tion control system (TCS) off indicator light”in the “Instruments and controls” section ofthis manual.

● If a malfunction occurs in the system,the and indicator lightscome on in the instrument panel.

As long as these lights are on, the traction controlfunction is canceled. The vehicle will behave likea vehicle without the system.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)(if so equipped)



WARNING

● The traction control system is designedto help improve driving stability butdoes not prevent accidents due toabrupt steering operation at highspeeds or by careless or dangerousdriving techniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especially careful whendriving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the traction control systemmay not operate properly and theindicator light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs and bushingsare not standard equipment or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the traction con-trol system may not operate properlyand the indicator light may comeon.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the traction control system may not op-erate properly and the indicatorlight may come on. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the tractioncontrol system may not operate prop-erly and the indicator light maycome on.

● The traction control system is not a sub-stitute for winter tires or tire chains on asnow covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if soequipped).

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING



DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used.

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables cannot be installed onP225/45R18 size tires. Installation of thetire chains/cables on P225/45R18 sizetires will cause damage to the vehicle. Ifyou plan to use tire chains/cables, youshould install P215/55R17 size tires onyour vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class 9S9 chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tires. Other types maydamage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners whenrecommended by the tire chain manufacturer toensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to prevent the pos-sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders

or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading yourvehicle when using tire chains. In addition, driveat a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle maybe damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on thefront wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENTIt is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-voir tank.



DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)An engine block heater to assist in extreme coldtemperature starting is available through aNISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Do not use your heater with an un-grounded electrical system or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. You can beinjured by an electrical shock if you use anungrounded connection.



6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-11


CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Shift the manual transmission into R(Reverse), or the automatic transmissioninto P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the manual transmission isshifted into R (Reverse), or the auto-matic transmission into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks s1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tires2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

WCE0044

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency


Getting the spare tire and toolsOpen the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting andspare tire cover. Remove the jack s1 and wheelnut wrench s2 from the tool box. Remove thespare tire.

Removing the bolt-on wheel cover (ifso equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-sult in personal injury.

The wheel covers are held on by the wheel nuts.The wheel cover will be removed along with thewheel when the nuts are removed.

Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

WCE0050 WCE0067 CE1089

In case of emergency 6-3


● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Always refer to the proper illustrations for thecorrect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.Align the jack head between the twonotches in the front or the rear as shown.Also fit the groove of the jack head betweenthe notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod with both hands. Carefully raise thevehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-move the wheel nuts, and then remove thetire.

LCE0020



Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ,sE ). Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tireplacard affixed to the center console.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floorcarpeting over the damaged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

WCE0056



To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

JUMP STARTING



WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift leverto N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P(Park) (automatic transmission). Switch offall unnecessary electrical systems (lights,heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (1) to positive(1) and negative (2) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

WCE0054



8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

CAUTION

● Three-way catalyst equipped modelsshould not be started by pushing. Thethree-way catalyst may be damaged.

● Automatic transmission models cannotbe push-started or tow-started. At-tempting to do so may cause transmis-sion damage.

● For manual transmission models, nevertry to start the vehicle by towing it.When the engine starts, the forwardsurge could cause the vehicle to collidewith the tow vehicle.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), or ifyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift lever toN (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P(Park) (automatic transmission).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).Open all the windows, move the heater or airconditioner temperature control to maximumhot and fan control to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS



3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time when the coolanttemperature is high.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE



For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (front) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the front wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is necessary totow the vehicle with the rear wheelsraised always use towing dollies underthe front wheels.

ACE0511

ACE1001



● When towing automatic transmissionmodels with the front wheels on towingdollies, or when towing manual trans-mission models with the front wheelson the ground:

– Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-sition, and secure the steering wheelin a straight-ahead position with arope or similar device. Never securethe steering wheel by turning the ig-nition key to the LOCK position. Thismay damage the steering lockmechanism.

– Move the gearshift lever to the N(Neutral) position.

● When towing automatic or manualtransmission models with the rearwheels on the ground (if you do not usetowing dollies): Always release theparking brake.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

Front

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

CAUTION

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the main structural members ofthe vehicle or the towing hooks (if soequipped). Otherwise, the vehicle bodywill be damaged.

● Do not use the vehicle tie downs to freea vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.Never tow the vehicle using the vehicletie downs or recovery hooks.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle. Neverpull the vehicle at an angle.

● Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or coolingsystems.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

LCE0098



3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (reverse)and D (drive) (automatic transmissionmodels) or 1st (low) and R (reverse)(manual transmission models).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D (automatictransmission models) or 1st and R(manual transmission models).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.

Rear

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

CAUTION

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the main structural members ofthe vehicle.

● Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or coolingsystems.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle. Neverpull the vehicle at an angle.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (reverse)and D (drive) (automatic transmissionmodels) or 1st (low) and R (reverse)(manual transmission models).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D (automatictransmission models) or 1st and R(manual transmission models).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.



7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6


In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable tothe effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care


UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be easierto clean if the high-mounted stop light is removedfirst.

Be careful when removing the high-mountedstop light to reduce the risk of damaging thehigh-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

s1 Push toward rear of vehicle.

s2 Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properlyreinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly, especially during win-ter months in areas where road salt is used. If notremoved, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may

WAI0007

Appearance and care 7-3


react with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily with anoil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

FLOOR MATSThe use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matter whatmats are used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly positioned inthe footwell to prevent interference withpedal operation. Mats should be maintainedwith regular cleaning and replaced if they be-come excessively worn.

CLEANING INTERIOR



Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s sideonly)This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floormats have been specially designed for your ve-hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has agrommet hole incorporated in it. Position the matby placing the floor mat bracket hook through thefloor mat grommet hole while centering the mat inthe footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle, and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

WAI0006

CORROSION PROTECTION



Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.




MEMO

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

4-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Temperature conditions for checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

Parking brake and brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Checking parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Checking brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31Front park/turn/sidemarker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40


Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47

Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48


Your new NISSAN has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements with longerservice intervals to save you both time andmoney. However, some day-to-day and regularmaintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as itsemission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide.” You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself


When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires,make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and checkfor any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheelalignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet .

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) positionmechanism On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selector lever inthe P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure it has the properdistance under it when depressed fully. Check

the brake booster function. Be certain to keep thefloor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal operatessmoothly and check that it has the proper freetravel.

Parking brake* Check that the lever/pedal hasthe proper travel and confirm that your vehicle isheld securely on a fairly steep hill with only theparking brake applied.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraintsmove up and down smoothly and the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3


Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Automatic transmission fluid level* Checkthe level after putting the selector lever in P (Park)with the engine idling at operating temperature.

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure thatthe brake and clutch fluid level is between theMIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.



When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. For manual transmissionmodels, move the shift lever to N (Neu-tral). For automatic transmission mod-els, move the selector lever to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may comeon at any time without warning, even ifthe ignition key is in the OFF positionand the engine is not running. To avoidinjury, always disconnect the negativebattery cable before working near thefan.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models with themultiport fuel injection (MFI) system,the fuel filter or fuel lines should beserviced by a NISSAN dealer becausethe fuel lines are under high pressureeven when the engine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS



You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.



QR25DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Spark plug coils3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)5. Air cleaner6. Battery7. Fuse/Fusible link box8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models)9. Engine oil dipstick10. Radiator cap11. Drive belt location12. Fuse block13. Windshield washer fluid reservoir14. Engine coolant reservoir15. Engine oil filler cap

NOTE:


WDI0488

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



VQ35DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)5. Air cleaner6. Battery7. Fuse/Fusible link box8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models)9. Engine oil dipstick10. Radiator cap11. Drive belt location12. Fuse block13. Windshield washer fluid reservoir14. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:


WDI0489



The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freezesolution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.Additional engine cooling system additives arenot necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

Outside temperaturedown to

GenuineNISSANLong Life

Antifreeze/Coolant orequivalent

Demineral-ized or dis-tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sureto use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalentwith the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilledwater. The use of other types of coolantsolutions or coolant colors, such as or-ange, may damage the engine coolingsystem.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

WDI0261

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM



CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

QR25DEWDI0211

VQ35DEWDI0212

ENGINE OIL



5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks sB . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark sA , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill sC .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler sA cap by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plugsB .

Type AWDI0213

Type BWDI0214

QR25DEWDI0492



5. Remove the drain plug sB with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

VQ35DEWDI0493



CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter sA .

4. Loosen the oil filter sA with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise. Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of the en-gine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

QR25DEWDI0494

VQ35DEWDI0495



WARNING

● When the engine is running, keephands, jewelry and clothing away fromany moving parts such as the coolingfan and drive belts.

● Automatic transmission fluid is poison-ous and should be stored carefully inmarked containers out of the reach ofchildren.

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FORCHECKING

● The fluid level should be checked using theHOT range on the dipstick after the followingconditions have been met:

– The engine should be warmed up to op-erating temperature.

– The vehicle should be driven at least 5minutes.

– The automatic transmission fluid shouldbe warmed to 122 - 176°F (50 - 80°C).

● The fluid can be checked at fluid tempera-tures of 86 - 122°F (30 - 50°C) using theCOLD range on the dipstick after the engineis warmed up and before driving. However,the fluid should be re-checked using theHOT range.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and setthe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and then move the shiftselector lever through each gear range, end-ing in P (Park).

3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling.

QR25DE engineWDI0219

4-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID



4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean withlint-free paper.

5. Reinsert the dipstick into the dipstick tubeas far as it will go.

6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. Ifthe automatic transmission fluid level iswithin the normal operating range sB , noadditional fluid is required. If the fluid level islow sA add fluid through the dipstick tube.

CAUTION

DO NOT OVERFILL. Use ONLY GenuineNissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. andAlaska) or Canada NISSAN AutomaticTransmission Fluid. DEXRON™III/MERCON™ or equivalent may also beused. Outside the continental UnitedStates and Alaska contact a NISSAN deal-ership for more information regardingsuitable fluids, including recommendedbrand(s) of DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ au-tomatic transmission fluid.

NOTE:

If the vehicle has been driven for a longtime at high speeds, or in city traffic in hotweather, or if it is being used to pull atrailer, the fluid level cannot be read accu-rately. You should wait until the fluid hascooled down (about 30 minutes) beforechecking fluid level.

WDI0221



When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

WARNING

● Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF.Do not mix with other fluids.

● Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic KATF will cause deterioration in drive-ability and automatic transmission du-rability, and may damage the automatictransmission, which is not covered bythe NISSAN new vehicle limitedwarranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is alsodescribed on caution labels located in the enginecompartment.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add GenuineNISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill throughthe opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.

● Recommended fluid is GenuineNISSAN PSF or equivalent.

WDI0256

5-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID



For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluidmay damage the brake and clutch sys-tems. The use of improper fluids can dam-age the brake system and affect the vehi-cle’s stopping ability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

CLUTCH FLUIDCheck the clutch fluid level in the reservoir(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level isbelow the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN SuperHeavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluidup to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-quently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

LDI0079 LDI0080

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID



WINDOW WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.Add window washer fluid when the low windowwasher fluid warning light comes on (if soequipped).

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift thecap off the reservoir tank and pour the windowwasher fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount of win-dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Anycorrosion should be washed off with a solu-tion of baking soda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-ated by the battery is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

WDI0223

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY



● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriveras shown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill.

WDI0224

LDI0302



Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

1. Power steering fluid pump2. Water pump3. Generator4. Air conditioner (if so equipped)5. Crank pulley6. Auto tensioner pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt(s) for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If thebelt is in poor condition or is loose, have itreplaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

QR25DE engineWDI0225

DRIVE BELTS



1. Power steering fluid pump2. Crank pulley3. Generator4. Air conditioner

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tippedspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceplatinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

QR25DE

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Remove the engine cover.

3. Remove the coil pack bolt.

4. Remove the coil pack/spark plug boot fromthe spark plug.

5. Remove the spark plugs with a spark plugsocket.

The plug socket has a rubber seal that holdsthe spark plug so it does not fall when it ispulled out. Make sure each spark plug issnugly fitted into the spark plug socket.

VQ35DE engineWDI0226 WDI0005

SPARK PLUGS



6. Fit the new plugs, one at a time, into thespark plug socket and install them. Useonly the specified spark plugs. Turneach plug several full turns by hand, thentighten with the spark plug socket to thecorrect torque. Do not overtighten.

Spark plug tightening torque:

14 - 22 ft-lb (20 - 29 N·m)

7. Install the coil pack/spark plug boot on thespark plug by pushing it on until you feel asnap.

8. Install the coil pack bolt.

Coil pack tightening torque:

48 - 65 in-lb (5.4 - 7.3 N·m)

9. Install the engine cover.

10. Connect the negative battery cable.

VQ35DEIf replacement is required, please see yourNISSAN dealer for assistance.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe theinside of the air cleaner filter housing and thecover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

s1 Loosen the screw clamp.

s2 Push down on the clips.

3. Remove the air cleaner housing.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if soequipped)The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce-dure:

LDI0428

AIR CLEANER



1. Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins.Remove the glove box from the opening andlet it hang by the cord.

2. Remove the filter cover from the intake unitby disengaging the 2 hook tabs at the bot-tom of the cover.

NOTE:

The filter is marked “UP”with an arrow. Theend of the filter with the arrow should facethe rear of the vehicle.

3. Slide the filter into the housing.

LDI0154 LDI0155 LDI0156



NOTE:

Make sure the filter sits on top of the 2supporting tabs on the housing.

4. Replace the cover by inserting the uppertabs inside the housing slot and pushing thehook tabs until they snap on to the housinglip.

5. Install the glove box door.

6. Fill out the date information on the smallreplacement label and attach it to the glovebox lid.

LDI0157



CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

s1 Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

s2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

s3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

WDI0194

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES



If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the washer nozzle s1 . This maycause clogging or improper windshield washeroperation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin s2 .

CHECKING PARKING BRAKEFrom the released position, pull the parking brakelever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks isout of the range listed, see a NISSAN dealer.

● 7 - 8 clicks under pulling force of44 lb (196 N).

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance Abetween the upper surface of the pedal and themetal floor. If it is out of the range shown, see aNISSAN dealer.

Distance A: Under depression force of110 lb (490 N)

AutomaticTransmission

ManualTransmission

3.55 in (90.3 mm)or more

3.31 in (84 mm)or more

WDI0424

WDI0228 WDI0229

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL



Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicatorsThe disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-

nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

BRAKE BOOSTERCheck the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release thebrake pedal several times. When brakepedal movement (distance of travel) remainsthe same from one pedal application to thenext, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start theengine. The pedal height should drop a little.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop theengine. Keep the pedal depressed for about30 seconds. The pedal height should notchange.

4. Run the engine for one minute without de-pressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.Depress the brake pedal several times. Thepedal travel distance will decrease graduallywith each depression as the vacuum is re-leased from the booster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

WDI0230

FUSES



3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with a newfuse sB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

WDI0452



PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with a knowngood fuse sB .

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

WDI0402Type A

WDI0452



Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

s1 Open the lid using a coin sA .

s2 Remove the battery sB .

s3 Install a new battery sC with the “+” facingdown.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

s4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

Type BLDI0456

LDI0484

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT



If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTSReplacing the xenon headlight bulb

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they pro-duce a high voltage. To prevent an electricshock, never attempt to modify or disas-semble. Always have your xenon head-lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. Foradditional information, see “Headlightand turn signal switch” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-cause the headlight assembly must be removedfrom the vehicle for bulb replacement, see yourNISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not leave the headlight assemblyopen without a bulb installed for a longperiod of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,etc. entering the headlight body mayaffect bulb performance. Remove thebulb from the headlight assembly justbefore a replacement bulb is installed.

● Only touch the plastic base when han-dling the bulb. Never touch the glassenvelope. Touching the glass could sig-nificantly affect bulb life and/or head-light performance.

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Low beam:Wattage: 55Bulb no.: H1*

High beam:Wattage: 60Bulb no.: HB3 (9005)*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latestparts information.

LIGHTS



FRONT PARK/TURN/SIDEMARKERLIGHTBulb replacement requires the removal of theheadlight assembly. If replacement is required,see your NISSAN dealer.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

2. Remove the two splash shield screws (seeillustration).

3. Position the splash shield aside to allowaccess to the fog light bulb.

● Disconnect the fog light electrical connectorsA .

● Rotate the fog light bulb counterclockwiseand pull it out of the fog light assembly sB .

● Follow the instructions in reverse order toinstall a new bulb.

WDI0262 WDI0232



EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assemblyLow (Halogen) 55 H1Low (Xenon) (special) D2RHigh 60 HB3 (9005)Park/Turn 27/8 1157NA

Front fog light 55 H11Step light — 158Rear combination light

Tail/Stop 8/27 3157Turn 27 3156Backup (reversing) 13 912Sidemarker 5 168

License plate light 5 W5WHigh-mounted stop light

Inside 18 921

Spoiler (if so equipped)See a NISSAN dealer

for assistance.Interior light 8 68Map light 10 578Trunk light 3.4 158Glove box light 3.4 658

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.



1. Map light2. Interior light3. Step light4. Fog light (if so equipped)5. Rear combination light6. License plate light7. Trunk light8. High-mount stoplight (if so equipped)9. Headlamp assembly

LDI0419



Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lampand/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth s1 to protect the interior light hous-ing.

WDI0263

Interior lightWDI0233

Step lightWDI0234



License plate lightWDI0235



Map light - Models with sunroofWDI0451



Map light - Models without sunroofWDI0237



Rear combination light

To access the bulbs in the rear combination light:

s1 Remove the 2 fasteners. Carefully push backthe carpet.

s2 Remove the 2 nuts and pull out the rearcombination light.

s3 Rotate the bulb(s) counterclockwise andpull out to remove:

sA Turn signal light

sB Sidemarker light

sC Tail/stop light

sD Backup light

WDI0238



If you have a flat tire, see the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tireand Loading Information label under the9Cold Tire Pressure9 heading. The Tireand Loading Information label is affixed tothe driver side center pillar. Tire pressuresshould be checked regularly because:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle has

High-mounted stop light (Rear window)WDI0320

Trunk lightWDI0343

WHEELS AND TIRES



been parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

If the tires are used at speeds above 100mph (162 km/h) where it is legal to do so(on a race track for example), the cold tireinflation pressure must be increased. Re-fer to 9Checking tire pressure9 later in thissection.

Set the tire pressure to the normal coldtire inflation pressure when the vehiclespeed or load is reduced.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. Thevehicle weight capacity is indi-cated on the Tire and LoadingInformation label (if soequipped). Do not load your ve-hicle beyond this capacity. Over-loading your vehicle may result inreduced tire life, unsafe operat-ing conditions due to prematuretire failure, or unfavorable han-dling characteristics and couldalso lead to a serious accident.Loading beyond the specified ca-pacity may also result in failure ofother vehicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (137 km/h) unless it isequipped with high speed ratedtires. Driving faster than 85 MPH(137 km/h) may result in tire fail-ure, loss of control and possibleinjury.

● Increase the cold tire inflationpressure as indicated in (Check-ing tire pressure( later in this sec-tion when using the tires speci-fied by NISSAN above 100 MPH(162 km/h) where it is legal to doso (on a race track for example).Failure to increase the cold tireinflation pressure may result intire failure, loss of control andpossible injury. After such use,readjust tire pressure.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.



Tire and loading information label

s1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

s2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section.

s3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

s4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

s5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

s6 and s7 Spare tire size or compactspare tire size (if so equipped).

LDI0392



Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

LDI0393



Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

High Speed/Maximum LoadCold Tire InflationPressure

Front Original Tire P215/60/R16 94T 200 kPa, 29 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSIP215/55R17 93HP215/55R17 93V 230 kPa, 33 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSI

P225/45R18 91Y 240 kPa, 35 PSI 260 kPa, 38 PSIRear Original Tire P215/60R16 94T 200 kPa, 29 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSI

P215/55R17 93HP215/55R17 93V 210 kPa, 30 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSI

P225/45R18 91Y 240 kPa, 35 PSI 260 kPa, 38 PSISpare Tire T135/70R16

T135/90R16T155/80R17

420 kPa, 60 PSI N/A

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

ExampleWDI0394



s1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The 9P9 indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The 9R9 stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

ExampleWDI0395



s2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Depart-ment Of Transportation.9 The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of Tire Identification Num-ber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

s3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

s4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

s5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

s6 Term of ”tubeless” or ”tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

s7 The word ”radial”

ExampleWDI0396



The word 9radial9 is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

s8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installing



studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables cannot be installed onP225/45R18 size tires. Installation of thetire chains/cables on P225/45R18 sizetires will cause damage to the vehicle. Ifyou plan to use tire chains/cables, youshould install P215/55R17 size tires onyour vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class 9S9 chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tires. Other types maydamage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when

recommended by the tire chain manufacturer toensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to prevent the pos-sibility of whipping action damage to the fendersor underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading yourvehicle when using tire chains. In addition, driveat a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle maybe damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on thefront wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

WDI0258



Wheel nut tightening torque:80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location markTire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


WDI0259



Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,speedometer calibration, headlight aimand bumper height. Some of these ef-fects may lead to accidents and couldresult in serious personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics and/orinterference with the brakediscs/drums. Such interference canlead to decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” sectionof this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.

● Do not install a deformed wheel or tireeven if it has been repaired. Suchwheels or tires could have structuraldamage and could fail without warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet .

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.



● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-gency use only. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tireat 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive the vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire should be used on therear wheels and the original tire usedon the front wheels (drive wheels). Usetire chains only on the front (original)tires.

● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire will wear at a faster ratethan the standard tire. Replace thespare tire as soon as the tread wearindicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do notdrive over obstacles. Also, do not drivethe vehicle through an automatic carwash since it may get caught.




MEMO

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-25Event data recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-27

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27


The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and LubricantsUS measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 75.6 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1Engine oil *9

Drain and RefillWith oil fil-ter change

QR25DE 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.2 QR25DE engine• API Certification Mark *2 *3• API grade SG/SH Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving *2 *3• ILSAC grade GF-II or GF-III*2 *3VQ35DE engine• API Certification Mark *2 *3• API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving *2 *3• ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II, or GF-III*2 *3

VQ35DE 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.2

Without oilfilter change

QR25DE 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0

VQ35DE 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0

Cooling systemWith reservoir

QR25DE 2 gal 1-5/8 gal 7.6 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent50% Demineralized or distilled waterVQ35DE 2-1/8 gal 1-3/4 gal 8.2

Manual transmission gear oil 2-3/8 qt 2 qt 2.2 Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85Automatic transmission fluid

4 Speed Refill to the proper level according to theinstructions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.*10

Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid.*4

5 Speed Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF *5

Power steering fluid (PSF) — — — Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*6Brake and clutch fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*8Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent*8Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”*3: For further details, see “Recommended SAE viscosity number.”*4: DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ or equivalent may also be used. Outside the Continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, includingrecommended brand(s) of DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ Automatic Transmission Fluid.*5: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission,which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.*6: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON™ III/MERCON™, or equivalent ATF may also be used.*7: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.*8: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”*9: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.*10: See you NISSAN dealer for service.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information


FUEL RECOMMENDATION

For 2.5L engine

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

For 3.5L


For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN rec-ommends the use of unleaded premium gasolinewith an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number(Research octane number 96).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasolineSome fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenatesSome fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

Technical and consumer information 9-3


If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.



ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See 9Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants9 earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. The chart “Rec-ommended SAE viscosity number” shows therecommended oil viscosities for the expectedambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosityother than that recommended could cause seri-ous engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals”.

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

WTI0082



Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the 9NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide9 for the maintenance schedule.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITYNUMBER

● SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for alltemperatures. SAE 10W-30 or SAE10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if theambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C).

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSANA/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.

ATI1028



ENGINE

Model QR25DE VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

M/T

A/T (in “N” position) See the “Emission Control Information label” on the underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idlespeed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug

Standard PLFR5A-11 PLFR5A-11

Hot PLFR4A-11 PLFR4A-11

Cold PLFR6A-11 PLFR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS



WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)

Steel 16 x 6.5JJ 1.57 (40)

Aluminum 16 x 6.5JJ 1.57 (40)

Aluminum 17 x 7JJ 1.77 (45)

Aluminum 18 x 8JJ 1.77 (45)

T type (Spare) 16 x 4T 1.57 (40)

Tire size P215/60R16 94T

P215/55R17 93H

P215/55R17 93V

P225/45R18 91Y

Spare tire T135/70R16

T135/90R16

T155/80R17

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 192.3(4,884)

192.5(4,889)SE-R

Overall width in (mm) 70.4(1,788)

Overall height in (mm) 57.9(1,471)

57.4(1,459)SE-R

Front tread in (mm) 61.0(1,549)

Rear tread in (mm) 61.2(1,554)

Wheelbase in (mm) 110.2(2,799)

Gross vehicle weight rat-ing

lb (kg)See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label” on the centerpillar between the driver’s sidefront and rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)



When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

LTI0025 WTI0037

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION



ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

QR25DE engineWTI0096

VQ35DE engineWTI0049 LTI0026



EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed asshown.

LTI0027 LTI0120 LTI0028



Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

s1 Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisherat the location mark (small dimple) using a0.31 in (8 mm) drill. To avoid damaging thethreads behind the finisher, apply only lightpressure to the drill.

s2 Mount the license plate bracket using two ofthe four 8 mm slotted hex head screws.

3. Use the remaining two 8 mm slotted hexhead screws to mount the license plate tothe license plate bracket.

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

LTI0109

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION



● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped).

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.



VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as 9The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo9 on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped). Do not exceed the number ofoccupants shown as 9Seating Capacity9on Tire and Loading Information label (ifso equipped).

To get 9the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo9, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.

Example

LTI0152



Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of Weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.



● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem must be used.

TOWING A TRAILER



The GCWR equals the combined weight of thetowing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greaterthan these or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside

temperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.Pull to the side of the road to a safe area.Allow the engine to cool and return tonormal operation. See “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadKeep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent ofthe total trailer load within the maximum tongueload limits shown in the following “TowingLoad/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow forproper tongue load.

LTI0164 WTI0160



Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue load.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment and

cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 3,961 lb. (1796 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -4,203 lb. (1906 kg).

● Maximum Towing Load from “TowingLoad/Specification9 chart - 1,000 lb. (454kg).

TI1012M



4,203 lb. (1906 kg) GVWR

– 3,961 lb. (1796 kg) GVW

= 242 lb. (109 kg) Available for tongueweight

1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available fortowing

242 lb. (109 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg) Available capacity

= 24 % tongue weight

In this case, more tongue weight capacity isavailable than is needed to pull the maximumweight trailer. Remember to keep trailer tongueweight between 10 – 15 % of the trailer weight. Ifthe tongue load becomes excessive, rearrangecargo to allow for proper tongue load. Alwaysverify that available capacities are under the re-quired ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION

UNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM TOWINGLOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM TONGUELOAD

100 (45)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available fromyour NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make surethe trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve-hicle, to help avoid personal injury or propertydamage due to sway caused by crosswinds,rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Sway control device

Sway control devices are used to help control theeffects of sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, andbuffeting caused by other vehicles. Make sure thesway control device is compatible with the trail-er’s brake system.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment to thevehicle that has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximumweight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of



towing the maximum trailer weights shown in theTowing Load/Specification Chart earlier in thissection.

CAUTION

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thehitch and/or receiver when not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed.



WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center of gravitylow.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicleand trailer so the required clearance isknown.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-ently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector lever to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the down hillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.



4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● When going down a hill, shift into a lowergear and use the engine braking effect.When going up a long grade, downshift thetransmission to a lower gear and reducespeed to reduce chances of engine over-loading and/or overheating. However, forlong steep grades, do not stay in 1st gearwhen driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h) or2nd gear when driving above 58 MPH (93km/h).

● If the engine coolant rises to an extremelyhigh temperature when the air conditionersystem is on, turn off the air conditioner.Coolant heat can be additionally vented byopening the windows, switching the fancontrol to high and setting the temperaturecontrol to the HOT position.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal toallow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditions allow.This combination will help stabilize the ve-hicle- Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Down shift the transmission to a lower gearfor engine braking when driving down steepor long hills. This will help slow the vehiclewithout applying the brakes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not useoverdrive.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually

● Do not use cruise control while towing atrailer.

● Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehicles that



are towing trailers. Obey the local speedlimits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When stopped in traffic for long periods oftime in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P(Park) position.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Automatic Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatictransmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUSTbe placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.

Manual Transmission

● Always tow with the manual transmission inNeutral.

● After towing 500 miles (805 km), start andidle the engine with the transmission in Neu-

tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engineafter every 500 miles (805 km) of towingmay cause damage to internal transmissionparts.



DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING



Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, CA 90248-0191

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, check the vehicle’sinspection/maintenance test readiness condi-tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and thenblinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is9not ready9. If the MIL does not blink after 20seconds, the I/M test condition is 9ready.9 If theMIL indicates the vehicle is in a 9not ready9 con-dition, drive the vehicle through the followingpattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. Ifyou cannot or do not want to perform the drivingpattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (USonly)

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST



WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to traffic con-ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C. Al-low the engine to idle until the gauge needlepoints between the C and H (normal oper-ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the acceleratorpedal completely and keep it released for atleast 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-able between steps. Do not stop the engine untilstep 7 is completed.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of comput-ers that monitor and control a number of systemsto optimize performance and help service techni-cians with diagnosis and repair. Some of thecomputers monitor emission control systems,braking systems, engine systems, transmissionsystems, tire pressure systems, and airbag sys-tems. Some data about vehicle operation may bestored in the computers for use during servicing.Other data may be stored if a crash event occurs.For example, vehicle speed, brake application,steering angle, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-mance, and seat belt use by the driver or passen-ger may be recorded. These types of systems aresometimes called Event Data Recorders.

Special equipment can be used to access theelectronic data that may be stored in the vehicle’scomputers (sounds are not recorded). NISSANand NISSAN dealers have equipment to accesssome of this data; others may also have thisequipment. The data may be retrieved duringroutine vehicle servicing or for special research. Itmight also be accessed with the consent of thevehicle owner or lessee, in response to a requestby law enforcement, or as otherwise required orpermitted by law.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS



A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISIONUnfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikelyevent, there is some important information youshould know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorizethe use of non-genuine collision parts in order tocut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSANcollision parts!If you want your vehicle to be restored using partsmade to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-tions – if you want to help it to last and hold itsresale value, the solution is simple. Tell yourinsurance agent and your repair shop to

only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-tection and maintain the resale value of yourvehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, usingGenuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-necessary excess wear and tear expenses at theend of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones tominimize the risk that the hood will penetrate thewindshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide suchbuilt-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?In over 40 states, the law says you must be ad-vised if non-genuine parts are used to repair yourvehicle. And some states have enacted laws thatrestrict insurance companies from authorizing theuse of non-genuine collision parts during the newvehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, soyou can take action to protect yourself.

It’s your right!If you should need further information visit us at:www.nissanusa.com.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION




MEMO

10 Index

A

Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact airbag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . .1-49, 2-13Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . .4-15, 4-15Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-22Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-20Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-22

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-16Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-11Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . . . .5-20Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-38FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-39Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-14Automatic transmission position indicatorlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Transmission selector lever lockrelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Belts (See drive belts) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29Brake

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . .5-20Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-33Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Parking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Brightness controlInstrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . . . .4-10Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-11Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

C

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . .4-40, 4-40CD changer (See audio system). . . . . . . .4-38Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-25Child restraints . . . . . . .1-11, 1-12, 1-17, 1-24

Precautions on child restraints . . .1-17, 1-29Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-26

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . .2-29Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-41

(models with navigation system) . . . . . .4-8Clutch

Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . .4-10


Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8English/metric button . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Fuel econ button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Maint (maintenance) button . . . . . . . . .4-4Prev button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-3Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-3Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

ControlsHeater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-20

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-9Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-8

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

D

Daytime running light system(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-24Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

DrivingCold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-12Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-25Engine

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . .8-10Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-13Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-9Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-8Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-12Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9English/metric button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-26Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-14Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-42Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-12

Fuel consumption gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Fuel econ button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

10-2


G

Garage door opener, HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-8Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-9Fuel consumption gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-10Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

H

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-26Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-21Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Heater

Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-20Heater operation . . . . . . .4-14, 4-14, 4-21

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-42

Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 3-2, 5-5Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-24Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-24Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Interior trunk lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-30Keyless entry system(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-5

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Emission control information label . . . . .9-11Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-49

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-12Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-49, 2-13Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-33Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-11Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-21Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-21Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-13Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-43Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-41Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-5

10-3


Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-12Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . .3-10

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-13Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

M

Maint (maintenance) button . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Maintenance

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3, 2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-24Mirror

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Multi-remote control system(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-5

N

NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 3-2, 5-5

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-13Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

OverheatIf your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-27Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

P

ParkingParking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-14Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . .5-18, 5-18

PowerPower outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Precautions on child restraints . . .1-17, 1-29Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-9Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Prev button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-3Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-42Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-38FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . .3-5Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-25

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-5Child seat belts . . . . . . . . . . .1-17, 1-29

10-4


Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-25Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Seat beltChild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-12Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-9Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-15Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-13

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start. . . . . . . . .2-17, 3-2, 5-5Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Shifting

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . .5-8, 5-8Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-15Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-41SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49Starting

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-3Steering

Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-49, 2-13Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-42Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-49Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-34Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-39Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-26Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-21Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-21Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Traction control system (TCS) offswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-19

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-8Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 3-2, 5-5Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-51Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-24Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-25Towing

Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-19Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

Traction control system (TCS) off switch . . .2-28Transceiver

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-42Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-14

10-5


Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-12Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-11

Travel (See registering your vehicle in anothercountry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . . . .1-6Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

U

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-24

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8Vehicle electronic system . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicleimmobilizer system), engine start . .2-17, 3-2, 5-5Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-49, 2-13Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-11Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-12Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-12Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-12Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-26Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-13Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-43Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-16Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-49Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-19Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehiclein another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-38Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-19

WiperWindshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-19Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

10-6


RECOMMENDED FUEL:

For 2.5L engine


For 3.5L engine


For improved performance, NISSAN recom-mends the use of unleaded premium gasolinewith an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number(Research octane number 96).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:

QR25DE Engine

● API Certification Mark

● API grade SG/SHEnergy Conserving II orAPI grade SJ or SL, Energy conserving

● ILSAC grade GF-II or GF-III

● 5W-30 Viscosity preferred

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

VQ35DE Engine

● API Certification Mark

● API grade SG/SHEnergy Conserving I & II orAPI grade SJ or SL Energy conserving

● ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II or GF-III

● 5W-30 Viscosity preferred

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:See tire placard.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found inthe “Starting and driving” section of this manual.Follow these recommendations for the future re-liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION


1. Engine coolant 8-9

2. Window washer fluid 8-18

3. Engine oil 8-10

4. Passenger supplemental front impact air bag1-34

5. Audio system 4-23, 4-25, 4-30; Air condi-tioner 4-11, 4-20

6. Supplemental side-impact air bag(if so equipped) 1-34

7. Front seats 1-2

8. Spare tire 6-2

9. Fuel-filler door release 3-12; Fuel recom-mendation 9-3

10. Keys 3-2

11. Supplemental side-impact air bag(if so equipped) 1-34

12. Seat belts 1-9

13. Trunk release 3-10

14. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag(if so equipped) 1-34

15. Driver supplemental front impact air bag1-34

16. Hood release 3-9

17. Meters and gauges 2-3WGS0016

QUICK REFERENCE


foreword read firstŠthen drive safely · 5. air cleaner (p. 8-22) 6. battery (p. 8-18) 7....

Documents